JP6658832B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  More specifically, in the slot machine, a lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in a situation where a medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reel corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a combination lottery executing means for executing combination lottery processing,
Winning correspondence giving means for giving a winning correspondence privilege corresponding to a winning combination in the combination lottery process,
In the pre-transition state, the transition lottery process is executed under at least one condition that the predetermined lottery has been won in the role lottery process, and when the transition lottery process results in the transitional lottery, the advantage of the player is predetermined. Advantageous transition means for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state higher than the gaming state,
In the pre-transition state, a lottery process is performed as to whether or not the degree of expectation regarding the advantageous gaming state is to be increased under at least one condition that another role has been won in the role lottery process. An expectation improving means for increasing the expectation in the state before the transition when winning to increase the
With
The separate role does not serve as an opportunity for giving the advantageous gaming state in the state before the transition, but serves as the opportunity for grant in other gaming states,
The expectation improved means state, and are not to increase the expectation by increasing the probability of transition winning at the transition lottery process,
The predetermined combination may be a trigger for giving the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but is not a trigger for the grant in the other gaming state .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to aim at the entertainment improvement of a game suitably.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing the state where the front door was opened. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the pattern which can be visually recognized from a display window, and a combination line. It is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be given. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of a stop symbol when each winning occurs. (A)-(g) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of a stop symbol when each winning occurs. It is a front view of (a) the acquired number display part and the internal state notification part, (b) is a front view of the privilege point notification part and the stock notification part, and (c) is a front view of the victory number notification part. FIG. 3 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process executed by a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process performed by the main side MPU. It is a figure showing an example of a lottery table for non-internal states. It is a figure showing an example of a lottery table for internal back states. It is an explanatory view for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode to be established. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the winning data performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination processing performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the CB state process performed by the main side MPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining a mode of a transition of a game state generated under the control of the main MPU. 5 is a timing chart for explaining a light emission control mode of an internal state notification unit. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first weight setting process executed by a main MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second weight setting process executed by a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bonus AT management processing performed by the main side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a mode in the case where a 1st special replay win or a disconnection result is obtained in the CB internal rear state. It is a timing chart which shows a mode in a case where the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning is achieved in the state after the inside of the CB. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the CB state and the bonus AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the periodic process performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the standby effect setting process performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for CB performed by a sub side MPU. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a mode of transition from a non-AT state to an AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process during non-AT performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer chance management process performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during a transfer chance performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling game management process performed by a sub side MPU. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining each game state included in the AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process during AT performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for AT state before branch performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st addition processing performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the additional state performed by a sub side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the notification control processing performed by a sub side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stock notification table. (A) is a timing chart for explaining how bonus points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the pre-branch AT state, and (B1) to (B4) show light emission modes of a bonus point notification unit and a stock notification unit. It is an explanatory view for explaining. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the branch AT state performed by the sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for branch AT states performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2nd addition performed by sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the completion | finish process of the branch AT state performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pre-branch AT state performed by a sub side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the progress aspect of a branch AT state, (B1)-(B6) It is a figure which shows simply the content of the battle effect in an image display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the AT continuation probability in an AT continuation lottery process is promoted. It is a timing chart which shows the transition timing to the additional state in the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for additional states performed by a sub side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the addition mode in an addition state, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a privilege point counter. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the last chance performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus AT performed by a sub side MPU. It is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electric configuration of a game hall in which a number of slot machines are installed, and (b) is a front view of an external terminal board provided in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of completion | finish performed by a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the bell winning determination processing performed by the main side MPU. 38 is a timing chart showing how an output state of an AT1 signal is changed in relation to a bell combination. It is a flowchart which shows the normal replay push order determination processing performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the start performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for normal replay performed by a sub side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for pressing order avoidance performed by a sub side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows a mode that an output mode of an AT1 signal is changed in relation to a normal replay combination. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process before a start performed by the main side MPU. It is a timing chart which shows the output form of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state. It is a timing chart which shows the output form of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal when shifting to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state. It is a flow chart which shows AT1 signal and AT2 signal setting processing performed by a main side MPU in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the last chance state performed by sub side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the completion | finish process of the normal AT state performed by the sub side MPU in 4th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, and FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 opened.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

  On the front side of the housing 11, a front door 12 is attached. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the inner space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed using the left side as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so as not to be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface thereof, and the locked state is released by an unlocking operation of the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 for notifying a player of a game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. In the gaming panel 20, three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are formed so as to be arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate, and a reel unit 31 is attached to an upper portion of the partition plate. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R on a one-to-one basis. I have. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the corresponding display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

  Each of these reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor (not shown), and each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. Has become.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. When the start lever 41 is operated while a medal is being inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the same time.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 which are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are respectively disposed immediately below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 is in a state where it can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

  The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. Until execution of various processes such as management of a game state is completed, this corresponds to one game.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided by a selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 to the hopper device 53 when insertion is possible, and when the insertion is impossible. It is guided to a medal tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided at a lower part of the front surface of the front door 12. Note that the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal discharge opening 58 when a winning corresponding to the award of the medal is established on the activated line. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided below the medal slot 45 when the medal inserted into the medal slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals are inserted at a time. And a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

  On the left side of the start lever 41, a settlement button 51 is provided. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as a virtual medal until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated in the state where the data is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 58 as a real medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power button 55 operated at the time of power-on or power-off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from "Setting 1" to "Setting 1". And a setting key insertion hole 57 operated for changing within the range of “setting 6”.

<Symbol attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R>
Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 3 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the center reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Also, numbers are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from 0 to 20, and these numbers are in a state where the main controller 70 can visually recognize them from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. It is a number for recognizing a symbol, and is not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the following description will be made using the numbers.

  As the symbols, a "bell" symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), a "replay 1" symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the 18th of the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (for example, 15th left reel 32L), "Replay 2" symbol (for example, 11th left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 10th left reel 32L), "Cherry" There are nine types of symbols (for example, the ninth of the left reel 32L), "Replay 3" symbols (for example, the sixth of the left reel 32L), and "white 7" symbols (for example, the fifth of the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 3, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  FIG. 4 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed such that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel allow the entire symbol to be visually recognized. Therefore, in a state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R. When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating in a state where a predetermined number of medals have been bet, and a winning corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, a medal payout privilege, replaying Either of the privilege of the transition of the game state and the privilege of the transition of the game state.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line where a winning can be achieved. The main line ML is not a straight line but a bent line. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The connected sub-line SL2, the middle design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the middle design of the right reel 32R, the lower design of the left reel 32L, the lower design of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. And a sub-line SL4 connecting the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, a sub-line SL5 connecting the lower symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. Even if the combination is established, no winning is established. The number of main lines is not limited to one, and may be two, three, four, or five or more. In such a configuration in which a plurality of main lines are set, the number of bets depends on the number of bets. The number of activated main lines may be different. Further, the main line is not limited to a configuration in which the main line is a bent line, and may be a line extending straight.

  Hereinafter, a correspondence relationship between a winning combination of symbols and a bonus granted in the event of winning will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be awarded and a privilege to be awarded in the event of award, and FIGS. 6A to 6G and FIG. FIG. 7A to FIG. 7G are explanatory diagrams for explaining aspects of a stop symbol when each winning has occurred.

  The small winning combinations in which medals are paid out include first to twelfth supplementary winning combinations, first bell winning combinations, second bell winning combinations, first watermelon winning combinations, and second watermelon winning combinations.

  In detail, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of a "white 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, a "red 7" symbol and a "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is One of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is one of the "Replay 1" symbol, the "Replay 2" symbol, and the "Replay 3" symbol. , The result is one of the first compensation prize to the ninth compensation prize. When the “red 7” symbol, the “bell” symbol, and the “bell” symbol are stopped from the left on the main line ML, a tenth supplementary prize is won, and the “BAR” symbol, the “bell” symbol from the left on the main line ML. When the "bell" symbol is stopped, the eleventh prize is won. When the "watermelon" symbol, the "bell" symbol and the "bell" symbol are stopped from the left on the main line ML, the twelfth prize is awarded. When one of the first to the twelfth compensation prize is won, one medal is paid out in the case of three bets, and two medals are paid out in the case of two bets.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is one of a “Replay 1” symbol, a “Replay 2” symbol, and a “Replay 3” symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, a first bell prize is won. In the case of the first bell prize, four medals are paid out in the case of three bets, and two medals are paid out in the case of two bets.

  In the case of the first bell prize, as shown in FIG. 6A, all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower sub-line SL4 are "bell" symbols. When the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a straight line, the player can easily recognize that the winning has been achieved. In this case, the same combination of "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed at the time of the first bell prize, so that the player can easily recognize the occurrence of the prize in the configuration in which the winning formation mode on the main line ML is diversified. It becomes possible.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "cherry" symbol and a "watermelon" symbol. If either of them is the second bell prize. In the case of the second bell prize, nine medals are paid out in the case of three bets, and two medals are paid out in the case of two bets.

  In the case of a second bell prize, as shown in FIG. 6B, all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the sub-line SL5 rising to the right become "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell has been won. The line on which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second bell is won is the sub-line SL5, which is different from the sub-line SL4 on which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won. Due to such a difference, it is possible for a player who determines whether or not a winning is to be performed based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols has been stopped and displayed to distinguish between the first bell winning and the second bell winning.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the “Replay 1” symbol, the “Replay 2” symbol, and the “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “watermelon” symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is a “watermelon” symbol, a first watermelon prize is won. In the case of the first watermelon prize, four medals are paid out when three bets are placed, and two medals are paid out when two bets are placed.

  In the case of the first watermelon prize, as shown in FIG. 6C, all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the subline SL1 descending to the right can be "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first watermelon has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L, the combination of the “watermelon” symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the "Cherry" symbol passes through the upper, middle or lower stage, the combination of the "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL1 when the first watermelon is won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is one of a “BAR” symbol and a “red 7” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “ In the case of a “watermelon” symbol, a second watermelon prize is won. In the case of the second watermelon prize, four medals are paid out when three bets are placed, and two medals are paid out when two bets are placed.

  In the case of the second watermelon prize, as shown in FIG. 6D, all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower sub-line SL4 are "watermelon" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second watermelon has been won. The line on which the combination of the “watermelon” symbols is stopped and displayed when the second watermelon wins is the subline SL4, which is different from the subline SL1 on which the combination of the “watermelon” symbols is stopped and displayed when the first watermelon wins. Due to such a difference, it is possible for a player who determines whether or not a winning is made based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed to distinguish between the first watermelon winning and the second watermelon winning.

  The prize to which a replay privilege that allows the player to play the next game without betting a medal (or a virtual medal) is given as a normal replay, a first bell replay, a second bell replay, and a first bell replay. There are a cherry replay prize, a second cherry replay prize, a first special replay prize, a second special replay prize, a first special replay prize, a second special replay prize, and a third special replay prize.

  In detail, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is any one of a "white 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, a "red 7" symbol and a "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is Normal replay prize when one of the “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol and “Replay 3” symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is one of the “White 7” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol Becomes

  In the case of the normal replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (e), all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the middle sub-line SL3 are "Replay 1" symbol, "Replay 2" symbol and "Replay 3". One of the symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a normal replay has been won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of a "white 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, a "red 7" symbol and a "watermelon" symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. If the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is one of the “cherry” symbol and the “watermelon” symbol, a first bell replay win is achieved.

  In the case of the first bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (f), all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper sub-line SL2 are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first bell replay has been won. The line on which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell replay is won is the sub-line SL2, and the sub-line SL4 on which the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won, and when the second bell is won. This is different from the subline SL5 in which the combination of the “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, the first bell replay prize can be distinguished from the first bell prize and the second bell prize for a player who determines the presence or absence of a prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. It becomes possible.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the “Replay 1” symbol, the “Replay 2” symbol, and the “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “Bell” symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the “white 7” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, and the “BAR” symbol, a second bell replay win is achieved.

  In the case of the second bell replay winning, as shown in FIG. 6 (g), all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the middle sub-line SL3 are "bell" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second bell replay has been won. The line where the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second bell replay is won is the sub-line SL3. The sub-line SL4 where the combination of the "bell" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell is won, and when the second bell is won. This is different from the sub-line SL5 in which the combination of the “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed and the sub-line SL2 in which the combination of the “bell” symbols is stopped and displayed when the first bell replay is won. Due to such a difference, the second bell replay prize is changed to the first bell prize, the second bell prize, and the first bell replay prize for a player who determines the presence or absence of a prize depending on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to distinguish them.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol, a "cherry" symbol. And a "watermelon" symbol, the first cherry replay win.

  In the case of the first cherry replay prize, as shown in FIG. 7A, all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the subline SL1 descending to the right may be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first cherry replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, the combination of the "cherry" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the first cherry replay prize is won, the "Cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a chance notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. A motivating effect is performed. The stop button 42 to 44 is operated to stop and display the "Cherry" symbol after confirming the effect, so that two "Cherry" symbols or three "Cherry" symbols are stopped in the sub-line SL1. Can be displayed.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is one of a “Replay 1” symbol, a “Replay 2” symbol, and a “Replay 3” symbol. When the stop symbol of the reel 32R is any of the "white 7" symbol, the "cherry" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol, the second cherry replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of the second cherry replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7B, all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper sub-line SL2 can be "cherry" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second cherry replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of "cherry" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When the player wins the role corresponding to the second cherry replay winning, the "cherry" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a chance notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. A motivating effect is performed. When the stop button 42 to 44 is operated to stop displaying the “Cherry” symbol after confirming the effect, two “Cherry” symbols or three “Cherry” symbols are stopped in the sub-line SL2. Can be displayed. The line on which the combination of the "Cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second cherry replay wins is different from the subline SL1 on which the combination of the "Cherry" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first cherry replay wins. Due to such a difference, it is possible for a player who determines the presence or absence of a prize based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed to distinguish between the first cherry replay prize and the second cherry replay prize.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of the “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2” symbol and “Replay 3” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 1” symbol. In the case of one of the "2" symbol and the "replay 3" symbol, the first special replay prize is won. The stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is arbitrary regarding whether or not the first special replay winning is achieved.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “Replay 1” symbol, “Replay 2”. If it is one of the symbol and the “Replay 3” symbol, a second special replay prize is won.

  When the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol on the main line ML, the first special replay win is achieved. The stop symbol of the left reel 32L is optional regarding whether or not the first special replay winning is achieved.

  In the case of the first special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7 (c), the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are all "white 7" symbols in the subline SL1 descending to the right and the subline SL5 rising in the right. Can be This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the first special replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "white 7" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize is won, the "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a chance notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. An incentive effect is performed. When the stop button 42 to 44 is operated to stop and display the "white 7" symbol after confirming the effect, three "white 7" symbols can be stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL1. Note that the effect can be executed even when the winning combination corresponding to the first special replay prize has not been won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either the "white 7" symbol or the "replay 1" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the symbol. In the case of the “white 7” symbol, a second special replay prize is won.

  In the case of the second special replay winning, as shown in FIG. 7D, all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the upper sub-line SL2 may be "white 7" symbols. In addition to this, all the stop symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower sub-line SL4 may be "white 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the second special replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "white 7" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the second special replay prize is won, the "white 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as a chance notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. An incentive effect is performed. The stop button 42 to 44 is operated to stop and display the “white 7” symbol after confirming the effect, so that the three “white 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL2. The line on which the combination of the "white 7" symbols is stopped and displayed when the second special replay is won is the sub-line SL2 or the sub-line SL4, and the sub-line SL1 on which the combination of the "white 7" symbols is stopped and displayed when the first special replay is won. And the sub-line SL5. Due to such a difference, it is possible for a player who determines whether or not a winning is made based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols is stopped and displayed to distinguish between the first special replay winning and the second special replay winning. Note that the effect can be executed even when a winning combination corresponding to the second special replay winning has not been won.

  On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of a "white 7" symbol, a "red 7" symbol and a "watermelon" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the right reel. When the stop symbol of the 32R is the “red 7” symbol, a third special replay prize is won.

  In the case of the third special replay prize, as shown in FIG. 7 (e), all the symbols stopped on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the lower sub-line SL4 can be "red 7" symbols. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the third special replay has been won. However, depending on the stop timing of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the combination of the "red 7" symbols is not stopped and displayed on a straight line. When a winning combination corresponding to the third special replay prize is won, the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R as a chance notification on the image display device 24 provided on the front door 12. An incentive effect is performed. By confirming the effect and stopping the stop buttons 42 to 44 to stop and display the “red 7” symbol, three “red 7” symbols can be stopped and displayed on the sub-line SL4. Note that the effect can be executed even when a winning combination corresponding to the third special replay prize has not been won.

  When any of the above-mentioned replay winnings is achieved, it becomes possible to play the next game without betting on both the medal and the virtual medal. Specifically, when a replay winning is achieved in a game in which three medals are bet, a game of the next game can be started in a three-bet state while betting is unnecessary for both medals and virtual medals. It becomes possible. Also, in the case of a replay winning in one of the games in which two medals are bet, it is possible to start the game of the next game in a two-bet state while making a bet unnecessary for both the medal and the virtual medal. .

  CB (Challenge Bonus) prize is a state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “Red 7” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “BAR” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “BAR” symbol. In some cases, a CB win is achieved. When the CB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  The CB state is a gaming state in which, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped on the main line ML, medals are paid out as winning formation regardless of the winning combination. For example, even if the winning flag corresponding to the first bell prize is not set to “1”, if the combination of the symbols corresponding to the first bell prize stops on the main line ML, the first bell prize is set. Are given to the player. On the other hand, the replay prize is established on condition that the corresponding role is won by lottery.

  In the CB state, reel control different from the non-CB state which is not the CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, reel control is performed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that a maximum of four symbols can be slid after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, it can be said that the reel control for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is performed. On the other hand, in the CB state, the above-described reel control, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game is performed on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, but the above-described reel control is not performed on the left reel 32L. With respect to the left reel 32L, reel control is performed so that the left reel 32 is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. In other words, in the CB game state, it can be said that reel control for stopping the left reel 32L until the specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time elapses after the left stop button 42 is operated is performed.

  In the CB state, if a winning combination corresponding to the replay winning is won, the replay winning is prioritized, and if the replay winning is impossible, any small winning combination occurs at 100%. In addition, when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning has not been won, any of the small winning combinations occurs at 100%. In this case, in the CB state, the number of bets for each game is set to two. If the number of bets is two as described above, the number of medals to be paid out is two no matter which of the small winning combinations is established. Therefore, in the CB state, the payout number of medals when the small winning combination is established is only two. When a replay winning is established in the CB state, the bet number in the next game is two. Therefore, in the CB state, either one of the payout of two medals and the replay in the two-bet state occurs in each game in which two bets have been bet, and in the CB state, the number of medals owned by the player increases or decreases. do not do. The CB state ends when the small win has occurred 19 times.

  In the CB game, the reel control for slipping only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the control corresponding to the stop button operated first for only one symbol is controlled. May be performed, and reel control may be performed such that only one symbol is slipped at a maximum for a predetermined reel. Further, a stop button operated in a certain order, such as performing a reel control in which the reel corresponding to the second operated stop button or the last operated stop button slides only up to one symbol at a maximum. May be controlled so that only one symbol at a maximum can be slipped on the reel corresponding to.

  As described above, the small winning combination, the replay winning, and the CB winning exist as the winning modes, but the lottery results of the internal lottery include outliers in which all of the winnings cannot be generated. Then, in the case of a departure result, as shown in FIG. 7 (f), the combination of the "white 7" symbols can be stopped on the middle sub-line SL3, and as shown in FIG. 7 (g). The combination of the “red 7” symbols may stop on the middle sub-line SL3. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the result has been missed. However, when the result of the departure is obtained, the combination of the symbols corresponding to any of the above winnings is not stopped and displayed on the main line ML. Also, in the case of a departure result, the line where the combination of the "white 7" symbol or the combination of the "red 7" symbol is stopped and displayed is the sub-line SL3, so that the first special replay winning, the second special replay winning and the third special replay winning are achieved. In the case of the replay winning, the combination of the "white 7" symbol or the combination of the "red 7" symbol is different from the sub line in which the combination is stopped and displayed. Due to such a difference, for a player who determines the presence or absence of a prize based on whether or not the combination of the same symbols has been stopped and displayed, the departure result is determined for the first special replay prize, the second special replay prize, and the third special replay prize. Can be distinguished.

<Devices for executing various announcements and various effects>
Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

  On the gaming panel 20 of the front door 12, a credit display section 61 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored, and the number of medals acquired at the time of winning are displayed below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. An acquired number display section 62 is provided. Each of the display units 61 and 62 is constituted by a 7-segment display, and a single-color light-emitting LED such as green is used for each segment.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired number display unit 62 is provided with an internal state notification unit 63 separately from the segment light emitting unit 62a for displaying the acquired number. As the internal state notification unit 63, a single color light emitting type LED of a display color different from that of the segment light emitting unit 62a is used. On the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62, the segment light emitting unit 62a is disposed on the center side, while the internal state notification unit 63 is disposed on the corner side of the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62. I have.

  The internal state notifying unit 63 is a display unit for notifying that the player has won the CB role. When the CB role is won, unlike the other winning roles, the winning state of the CB role is carried over until the CB winning is achieved on the main line ML, and the winning state of the CB role is released by the CB winning being realized. . In this case, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as a non-internal notification mode in a situation where the CB combination has not been won and in the CB state, and as an internal notification mode in a situation where the CB combination has been won. The lighting state is set. This lighting state is a state in which the lighting is maintained, but may be configured to blink in a predetermined cycle instead.

  By providing the internal state notification unit 63, it is possible to notify the administrator of the gaming hall and the like that the CB role has been won. Further, the segment light emitting section 62a of the acquired number display section 62 is turned on when a medal or virtual medal is given at the end of one game, turned off at the start of the next game, and turned off at the same time. Is maintained until a new small role prize is established. Therefore, in the configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is arranged in the acquired number display unit 62 so as not to be too conspicuous for the player, the acquired number display unit 62 is displayed when the CB combination is won. In this case, it is possible to positively cause a situation in which only the internal state notification unit 63 is in the lighting state, so that the administrator of the gaming hall can easily check the internal state notification unit 63. The effect of facilitating the confirmation can also be achieved by the internal state notification unit 63 having a different emission color from the segment light emission unit 62a.

  It should be noted that other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device may be used as the segment light emitting units of the credit display unit 61 and the acquired number display unit 62 and the internal state notification unit 63. Even in this case, by setting the internal state notification unit 63 on the display surface of the acquired number display unit 62, the confirmation of the internal state notification unit 63 is facilitated.

  On the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 64 that lights or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of right and left that emits various sound effects as the game progresses and informs the player of the game state. Speaker 65 and an image display device 66 such as a liquid crystal display device for giving various information to a player.

  Below the image display device 66, a privilege point notification unit 67 and a stock notification unit 68 are provided, and a victory number notification unit 69 is provided to the right of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R in the game panel 20. Have been.

  FIG. 8B is a front view of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68. As will be described in detail later, when a predetermined combination is won in the normal AT (assist time) state and the winning is achieved in the bonus point lottery process, the bonus points are added, and the number of points accumulated by the addition is determined as a reference point. When the number of points obtained is 7 points, the number of times set in the normal AT state is incremented by one, and the state shifts to an additional state.

  The privilege point notifying unit 67 is for notifying the surplus number when the remainder obtained by dividing the number of privilege points by 7 is 1 or more. The privilege point notification section 67 is provided with 7 × 2 unit point display sections 67a using single color light emitting type LEDs, and these unit point display sections 67a are left and right with the stock notification section 68 interposed therebetween. They are evenly arranged. In each of the pair of left and right display areas, seven unit point display sections 67a are provided. For example, when the number of privilege points is "1", each of the outermost one in each of the pair of left and right display areas is provided. The unit point display section 67a is turned on. For example, when the number of privilege points is "5", the five unit point display sections 67a from the outside in the pair of left and right display areas are turned on.

  The stock notification section 68 is for notifying the number of quotients when the quotient obtained by dividing the number of privilege points by 7 is 1 or more. The stock notification unit 68 uses a multi-color light emitting type LED, and notifies the number of stocks in the normal AT state by the color of the light emitted.

  FIG. 8C is a front view of the victory number notifying unit 69. As will be described later in detail, the normal AT state includes a pre-branch AT state and a branch AT state, and in the branch AT state shifted after the pre-branch AT state, a battle effect is performed on the image display device 66. Then, when the normal AT state continues, a victory effect of the ally character or a draw effect between the ally character and the enemy character is performed as the battle effect, and when the normal AT state does not continue, As the battle effect, a defeat effect of the ally character is performed. Then, when a predetermined number of executions of victory effects are performed in a series of normal AT states, the winning probability in the continuous lottery in the normal AT state is set to the highest probability.

  The number-of-wins display section 69 is for notifying the number of times a victory effect has been executed in a series of normal AT states. The victory number display section 69 is provided with twelve unit victory number display sections 69a, each of which corresponds to a predetermined number of executions, using a monochromatic LED. They are arranged in a circle. For example, when the number of victory effects in a series of normal AT states is one, one unit victory number display section 69a is turned on. For example, when the number of victory effects is five, five consecutive unit victory numbers are displayed. The unit 69a is turned on.

<Various control devices>
The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main controller 70 is attached to the back plate of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main board, and the main board is housed in a board box as a covering means made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are fastened by a fastening unit so that they cannot be opened. When the board box is opened, it is necessary to release the fastening state, and when the fastening state is released, a breakage point occurs. By confirming the presence or absence of the broken portion, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the substrate box has been opened.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub-controller 80 in addition to the main controller 70. The sub-control device 80 is arranged on the front door 12 behind the image display device 66. The sub-control device 80 controls the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, the image display device 66, the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the victory number notification unit 69 based on the command received from the main control device 70. . It should be noted that the sub-control device 80 has a control board housed in a board box, similarly to the main control device 70.

<Electrical Configuration of Slot Machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 72 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit 75 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor for individually detecting that each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, Stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operations of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44, inserted medal detection sensors 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and credit input buttons 47, 48, 49. , Credit detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a for detecting the operation of the settlement button 51, a payout detection sensor for the hopper device 53, and a reset detection sensor 56a for detecting the operation of the reset button 56. The setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57. And various sensors such as setting the key detection sensor 57a for detecting are connected to it, these signals from the sensors are input to the MPU 72.

  On the output side of the MPU 72, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), a payout motor of the hopper device 53, a credit display unit 61, an acquired number display unit 62, an internal state The notification unit 63, the sub control device 80, and the like are connected. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotational drive of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31, and controls the hopper device 53 to control the drive of the MPU 72 when a small portion win is achieved and medals are paid out. It is performed by The display control of the credit display unit 61, the acquired number display unit 62, and the internal state notification unit 63 is directly executed by the MPU 72 without passing through another control device. Commands are transmitted from the MPU 72 to the sub-control device 80 at each timing of each game.

  An external terminal board 90 is provided on the output side of the MPU 72. Although not shown, the external terminal board 90 is provided adjacent to the main control device 70 on the back plate of the housing 11. As will be described in detail later, the MPU 72 externally outputs various signals corresponding to the state of the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC provided in the game hall through the external terminal board 90.

  A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply unit 54 includes a power supply unit for supplying drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit applies an external power supply to the power supply unit. The MPU 72 monitors the monitored voltage and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes the process at the time of power failure by receiving the power failure signal, and makes it possible to return to the processing state before the power failure after the power recovery. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off-time power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-on-power-off when the supply of operation power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, the data is stored and held in the RAM 74 in a state where the backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during the power interruption (for example, one or two days). Is done. However, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized.

  The sub-control device 80 includes a sub-control board 81 for executing execution of various notifications and various effects. The MPU 82 is mounted on the sub-control board 81. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A certain RAM 84, a clock circuit 85 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built in.

  Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 be integrated into one chip for the MPU 82, and that each may be configured as an individual chip. Further, the RAM 84 is supplied with backup power from the power supply unit during the power interruption of the power supply device 54 in a state where the supply of the operation power from the external power supply is cut off, and the backup power is supplied (for example, one day). On the second day, the data is stored and held in the RAM 84. However, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 56 provided on the power supply 54 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 84 is initialized.

  The MPU 82 has an input port and an output port. As described above, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 82, and receives various commands from the MPU 72.

  The output side of the MPU 82 is connected to an upper lamp 64, a speaker 65, an image display device 66, a privilege point notification unit 67, a stock notification unit 68, and a victory number notification unit 69. In the MPU 82, based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main controller 70, the light emission control of the upper lamp 64, the sound output control of the speaker 65, the display control of the image display device 66, the light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67, the stock notification unit By executing the light emission control of 68 and the light emission control of the victory number notification unit 69, various notifications and various effects are performed.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, the ROM 73, and the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as a main MPU 72, a main ROM 73, and a main RAM 74, respectively. The MPU 82, the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-side RAM 84 are called.

<Process Performed by Main MPU 72 and Sub MPU 82>
Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 will be described. First, the contents of the basic processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described.

  The processes of the main MPU 72 are roughly classified into a normal process that is repeatedly executed after the execution of the main process started upon power-on, and a timer interrupt process that is periodically interrupted and started with respect to the normal process. Yes, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing will be described first, and then the normal processing will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing is started, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  In the register save processing shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal processing described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S103, and the process at the time of power failure is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the process at the time of a power failure, it is first determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated, the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal at the time of the blackout is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, thereby prohibiting the RAM access thereafter. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  If the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 are performed. That is, in step S104, a clearing process of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process for enabling the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself is performed. In step S106, a stepping motor control process for driving each stepping motor is performed to rotate each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In step S107, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and a sensor monitoring process of monitoring whether the read result is normal is performed. In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the outside is performed.

  In step S110, a command output process of transmitting various commands to the sub control device 80 is performed. In step S111, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S112, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S101 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and the series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S201, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling the game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the sub-control device 80 or the like completes the initialization. When the initialization of the sub-control device 80 and the like has been completed, the process proceeds to steps S203 to S219.

  In step S203, it is determined whether or not the wait time before the start set in the previous game has elapsed. If the wait time before the start has not elapsed, the process of step S203 is executed again, and if the wait time before the start has elapsed, a start waiting process is executed in step S204. In addition, when the wait time before the start is set, when a negative determination is once made in step S203, the measurement of the wait time is started. If the wait time has not been set, the process directly proceeds to step S204.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings has occurred, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process ends. If no replay winning has occurred, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 has been operated, and if the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. A medal return process is performed. After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. Then, if any of them is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the bet number and the like is performed, and the start waiting process ends. If neither the medal insertion nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the present start wait process, the start wait process ends.

  After the end of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number ("3" or "2" in the present embodiment), and the bet number has not reached the specified number. In this case, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204. If the number of bets has reached the specified number, an external output setting process before starting is executed in step S206. In the external output setting process, various settings for external output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Thereafter, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated.

  If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204. On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a predetermined number of medals are bet. Indicates that a command has been issued. In such a case, after activating the main line ML, the bet acceptance is prohibited by controlling the selector 52 in step S208. Then, in step S209, a lottery process for performing a lottery of a winning combination in the current game is executed, and in step S210, various settings for externally outputting to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 are performed. Execute the external output setting process at the start of. Then, in step S211, it is determined whether or not the freeze time set in the lottery process in step S209 has elapsed. If the freeze time has not elapsed, the process of step S211 is executed again, and if the freeze time has elapsed, the processes of step S212 and thereafter are executed. Note that when the freeze time is set, the measurement of the freeze time is started when a negative determination is made once in step S211. If the freeze time has not been set, the process directly proceeds to the processing after step S212.

  In step S212, a reel control process for driving and controlling each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is executed. Thereafter, in step S213, a medal payout process is executed. In the medal payout process, when a small winning combination is established in the current game, a process for giving the player the number of medals or virtual medals corresponding to the small winning combination is executed. More specifically, when giving a virtual medal, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the virtual medal area provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the virtual medal area reaches the maximum value. If so, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that medals exceeding the maximum value are paid out to the medal tray 59.

  After that, in step S214, CB state processing for controlling the CB state is executed, and in step S215, bonus AT management processing for controlling the bonus AT (assist time) state is executed, and further, in step S216. Then, an external output setting process at the end of performing various settings for externally outputting to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90 is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S217, it is determined whether or not the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If the determination in step S217 is affirmative, the process returns to step S201. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S217, it is determined in step S218 whether the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has not elapsed, the process of step S218 is executed again. If the wait time has elapsed, the bonus AT setting process is executed in step S219, and the process returns to step S201. When the wait time is set, if a negative determination is made once in step S218, measurement of the wait time is started. If the wait time has not been set, the process directly proceeds to step S219.

  Hereinafter, the lottery process in step S209, the reel control process in step S212, the CB status process in step S214, and the bonus AT management process in step S215 will be described in detail. Note that the external output setting processing in step S206, step S210, and step S216 will be described in detail after the flow of the game is described.

<Lottery process>
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the lottery process in step S209 in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S301, a random number to be used when making a determination as to whether a winning combination is obtained is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid a problem such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After the random number is obtained, in step S302, a lottery table for performing the determination of winning / losing of the combination is read from the main ROM 73. In the slot machine 10, there are three types of gaming states in which the lottery tables are different in the main MPU 72: a non-CB internal state, a CB internal rear state, and a CB in-state. In step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the contents of the flag corresponding to the gaming state provided in the main RAM 74, and a lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is selected. Specifically, when the current game state is the CB non-internal state, the non-internal state lottery table is selected, and when the current game state is the CB internal post state, the internal post state lottery table is selected. If the current game state is the CB state, the CB state lottery table is selected.

  In the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into a setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and perform a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which of the winning probabilities the internal processing is executed. The internal rear state lottery table is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with the six-stage setting states. In step S302, when the setting state is “setting 1”, the internal rear state having the lowest expected medal payout value is set. The lottery table for internal use is selected, and at the time of “setting 6”, the lottery table for the internal rear state having the highest expected value of the medal payout is selected. On the other hand, only one type of non-internal state lottery table and CB lottery table is prepared so as to be common to all setting states.

  Each lottery table will be described. First, the non-internal state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 is appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 13, an index value IV is set in the non-internal state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set. . The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free-run counter.

  Specifically, at IV = 1, the second bell winning data, the first compensation winning data, the fifth compensation winning data, and the ninth compensation winning data are set. In the case where the winning is achieved with IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is performed when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The bell prize is reliably generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any one of the first compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the first compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize will occur.

  At IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second supplementary winning data, the fourth supplementary winning data, and the ninth supplementary winning data are set. In the case where the winning is made at IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is performed when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell prize is generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any of the second prize, the fourth prize and the ninth prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize will occur.

  At IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the second supplemented winning data, the sixth supplemented winning data, and the seventh supplemented winning data are set. In the case where the winning is achieved with IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is performed when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The bell prize is generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any of the second compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, and the seventh compensation prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the second compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, and the seventh compensation prize is generated.

  At IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 13, the second bell winning data, the third supplemented winning data, the fifth supplemented winning data, and the seventh supplemented winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with IV = 4, as shown in FIG. 15, the second stop is performed when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The bell prize is reliably generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in any other case, any of the third prize prize, the fifth prize prize and the seventh prize prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the third compensation winning, the fifth compensation winning, and the seventh compensation winning occurs.

  At IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplemented winning data, the third supplemented winning data, the fourth supplemented winning data, the fifth supplemented winning data, and the eighth compensated winning data are selected. Compensation winning data and ninth compensation winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 5, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the first bell prize reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any of the first compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize may occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, none of the first compensation prize, the third compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the fifth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize are generated. there is a possibility. The probability of occurrence of this missing is lower than in the case of IV = 1 to 4.

  At IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 13, the first bell winning data, the first supplemented winning data, the second supplemented winning data, the fourth supplemented winning data, the sixth supplemented winning data, and the eighth compensated winning data Compensation winning data and ninth compensation winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 6, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell prize reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, In other cases, any of the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize may be generated. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, any of the first compensation prize, the second compensation prize, the fourth compensation prize, the sixth compensation prize, the eighth compensation prize, and the ninth compensation prize does not occur. there is a possibility. The probability of occurrence of this missing is lower than in the case of IV = 1 to 4.

  At IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 13, the first watermelon winning data, the second watermelon winning data, the tenth supplemented winning data, the eleventh supplemented winning data, and the twelfth supplemented winning data are set. ing. In the case of winning with IV = 7, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, a first watermelon prize or a second watermelon prize can be established. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that neither the first watermelon winning nor the second watermelon winning occurs. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, any of the tenth prize, the eleventh prize, and the twelfth prize can occur. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that none of the tenth compensation prize, the eleventh compensation prize, and the twelfth compensation prize will occur.

  At IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 13, normal replay winning data is set. When the winning is made at IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 15, the normal replay winning is reliably generated regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  At IV = 9, CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. If the winning is achieved with IV = 9, a CB winning may occur regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, a CB winning may not occur.

  When the non-internal state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, and the case of IV = 4 Is about 1 / 9.3 each, and the probability of winning when IV = 5 and the probability of winning when IV = 6 are about 1 / 11.6, respectively. , When IV = 7, the probability of winning is about 1 / 66.7, when IV = 8, the probability of winning is about 1/7, and when IV = 9, the probability of winning is: It is about 1 / 4.3.

  Next, the internal rear state lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 15 is appropriately referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 14, an index value IV is set in the internal post-state lottery table, similarly to the non-internal state lottery table, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. And a point value PV is set.

  The winning data set to IV = 1 to 8 is the same as in the case of the non-internal state lottery table.

  In IV = 9, first bell replay winning data and first cherry replay winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with IV = 9, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay winning reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In other cases, the first cherry replay winning is reliably generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  At IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, and the first special replay winning data are set. When the winning is made at IV = 10, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. I do. When the winning is achieved at IV = 10 and the left reel 32L is first stopped, the second bell replay prize is won when the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing enabling the second bell replay prize to be generated. Is given priority, and the first special replay prize is generated when the timing is such that the second bell replay prize cannot be generated. Further, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, the first cherry replay winning is reliably generated regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  At IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 14, first bell replay winning data, first cherry replay winning data, second special replay winning data, and third special replay winning data are set. In the case of winning with IV = 11, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the first bell replay winning reliably occurs regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. . In other cases, a first cherry replay winning, a second special replay winning, or a third special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second special replay prize and the third special replay prize may not be generated depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay prize may be generated by each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Occurs regardless of operation timing. When the winning is performed at IV = 11 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing at which the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning can be generated. , Priority is given to the occurrence of the second special replay prize or the third special replay prize, and to the first cherry replay prize if the timing at which the occurrence of the second special replay prize and the third special replay prize is impossible is reached. Occurs.

  In IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the second special replay winning data are set. When the winning is made at IV = 12, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, a second bell replay prize or a first special replay prize is generated. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. I do. When the winning is achieved at IV = 12 and the left reel 32L is first stopped, and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is a timing at which the second bell replay winning can be generated, the second bell replay winning is achieved. Is given priority, and the first special replay prize is generated when the timing is such that the second bell replay prize cannot be generated. When the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a first cherry replay prize or a second special replay prize is generated. In this case, the second special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. I do. If IV = 12 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing enabling the generation of the second special replay prize, 2. The occurrence of the second special replay prize is prioritized, and if the timing is such that the second special replay prize cannot be generated, the first cherry replay prize is generated.

  In IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 14, the second bell replay winning data, the first cherry replay winning data, the first special replay winning data, and the first special replay winning data are set. When the winning is made at IV = 13, as shown in FIG. 15, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second bell replay winning or the first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the second bell replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. I do. If the winning is achieved at IV = 13 and the left reel 32L is operated to stop first, the second bell replay prize is won if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing enabling the second bell replay prize to be generated. Is given priority, and if it is a timing when the occurrence of the second bell replay prize is impossible, the first special replay prize is generated. When the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R, a first cherry replay winning or a first special replay winning occurs. In this case, the first special replay winning may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first cherry replay winning may occur regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. I do. If IV = 13 and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is first stopped, and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is the timing enabling the generation of the first special replay prize, The occurrence of the first special replay prize is prioritized, and the first cherry replay prize is generated when the timing at which the first special replay prize cannot be generated is reached.

  At IV = 14, first cherry replay winning data is set as shown in FIG. When the winning is made at IV = 14, as shown in FIG. 15, the first cherry replay prize reliably occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. .

  At IV = 15, the second cherry replay winning data is set as shown in FIG. In the case of winning at IV = 15, as shown in FIG. 15, the second cherry replay prize reliably occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. .

  At IV = 16, first special replay winning data and second special replay winning data are set as shown in FIG. When the winning is made at IV = 16, as shown in FIG. 15, the first special replay winning or the second special replay winning occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. In this case, the second special replay win may not occur depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, whereas the first special replay win may occur regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. I do. When the winning is achieved at IV = 16, if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is a timing enabling the generation of the second special replay winning, the occurrence of the second special replay winning is prioritized, and the second special replay winning is prioritized. If the timing is such that a special replay prize cannot be generated, a first special replay prize is generated.

  When the internal rear state lottery table is selected, the probability of winning when IV = 1, the probability of winning when IV = 2, the probability of winning when IV = 3, and the case of IV = 4 Is about 1 / 9.3 each, and the probability of winning when IV = 5 and the probability of winning when IV = 6 are about 1 / 11.6, respectively. , IV = 7, the probability of winning is about 1 / 66.7, when IV = 8, the probability of winning is about 1 / 2.2.9, and when IV = 9, the winning is achieved. The probability is about 1/65, the probability of winning when IV = 10 is about 1/135, the probability of winning when IV = 11 is about 1/3277, and when IV = 12 The probability of winning is about 1/1456, the probability of winning when IV = 13 is about 1/1456, and when IV = 14 The probability of winning is about 1/212, the probability of winning when IV = 15 is about 1/185, the probability of winning when IV = 16 is about 1/328, and IV = The probability of an out-of-order result not being won in any of 1 to 16 is 1/65536.

  Next, the CB state lottery table will be described.

  An index value IV is set in the lottery table for the CB state similarly to the lottery table for the non-internal state and the lottery table for the internal rear state, and each index value IV is associated with a winning combination. And the point value PV is set. In the CB state lottery table, only the normal replay winning data is set as IV = 1, and other winning data is not set. The winning probability is the same as in the case of the internal rear state lottery table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may have a configuration in which the probability of winning the normal replay combination is higher or lower than that in the case of the internal rear state lottery table.

  In the CB state lottery table, only the normal replay combination is set as described above. However, as described above, in the CB state, in the situation where the normal replay combination has not been won, regardless of the result of the lottery process, the small combination prize is won. Can be generated, and the reel control is executed so that any small winning combination can be reliably generated in a situation where the normal replay combination is not won. Therefore, in the CB state, when the normal replay combination is won, the normal replay winning is reliably generated, and when the normal replay combination is not selected, any small winning combination is reliably generated.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), after selecting the lottery table in step S302, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and in the subsequent step S304, a determination value DV used when determining whether or not the role is set is set. I do. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a point value PV corresponding to 1, which is the current index value IV, is added to the random number value to generate a new value. The determination value is DV.

  After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the role corresponding to the index value IV is correct. In the determination of the winning or losing of the role, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If the value exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, in which winning data acquisition processing for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed.

  In the winning data acquisition process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S401, a corresponding winning flag setting process is executed. For example, when the IV is won in the CB internal rear status, among the flags provided in the main-side RAM 74, a flag indicating that the winning has been achieved with the IV = 1 and a second bell winning The flag, the first compensation winning flag, the fifth compensation winning flag, and the ninth compensation winning flag are each set to “1”. Further, for example, when the player wins IV = 8 in the CB internal rear state, a flag indicating that the player has been won at IV = 8 among the flags provided in the main RAM 74 and a normal replay winning "1" is set to each of the flags.

  In the following step S402, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 in the immediately preceding step S401. If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the lighting process of the internal state notification unit 63 is performed in step S403, and then the true selection data acquisition process ends. Thereby, the internal state notifying unit 63 is turned on, and the manager of the gaming hall and the player are notified that the CB is in the inside rear state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S402, it is determined in step S404 whether the normal replay winning flag is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S404, a push order lottery process is executed in step S405, and in step S406, a push order command including push order data corresponding to the result of the push order lottery process is executed. After the setting for transmission to the side MPU 82, the process of obtaining the true selection data ends.

  As described above, when the normal replay combination is won, a normal replay win occurs regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In this case, in step S405, a pressing order lottery process is executed to generate an opportunity to set an AT1 signal to be described later to an OFF state. In the pressing order lottery process, the first stop target reel and the second stop target reel are determined by lottery, and the lottery is performed so that the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is selected as the first stop target reel. The sub-MPU 82 controls the display of the image display device 66 so that when the normal AT state described later is extended, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the push order data of the push order command is displayed. Execute The function and effect of performing such processing will be described later in detail.

  If a negative determination is made in step S404, it is determined in step S407 whether the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process of obtaining the true selection data ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S407, the value corresponding to the first freeze time (specifically, 39 seconds) is set in the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 in step S408, and then the true selection data is set. Ends the acquisition process.

  When the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), and the execution of the processing after step S212 is awaited. That is, the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Further, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer decrement process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). As a result, when the first special replay winning flag is set to “1” as a result of the lottery process, the start of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited for 39 seconds. During this freeze period, as will be described later, control by the sub-MPU 82 is performed so that the first freeze-compatible effect is performed on the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. Thus, the player can clearly recognize that the first special replay combination has been won.

  If the winning flag in which "1" is set is not the CB winning flag, "0" is cleared after the game in which the winning flag is set. On the other hand, when the winning flag in which “1” is set is the CB winning flag, the condition is reset on the condition that the CB winning has been achieved. That is, the state in which the CB winning flag is set to “1” may be valid over a plurality of games.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 12), if the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV has been lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the incremented index value IV has exceeded the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304, and the determination of the combination of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV used for the previous combination determination (that is, the current determination value DV) to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S305, a winning combination determination is performed based on the determination value DV.

  If it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the result of the lottery process of the current game is a result of a miss. In this case, in step S309, it is determined whether or not the state is the CB internal rear state by checking the flag of the main RAM 74. If an affirmative determination is made in step S309, a value corresponding to the second freeze time (specifically, 35 seconds) is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74 in step S310.

  As described above, when the value of the freeze counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S211 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), and the execution of the processing after step S212 is awaited. That is, the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Further, the value set in the freeze counter is periodically decremented in the timer decrement process of step S108 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10). Thus, when the result of the lottery process is out of order in the CB internal rear state, the start of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is waited for 35 seconds. During this freeze period, as will be described later, control by the sub-MPU 82 is performed so that the second freeze-compatible effect is performed on the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. As a result, the player can clearly recognize that the lottery result has been deviated in the after-CB state.

  When the processing in step S306 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S309, or when the processing in step S310 is executed, it means that the determination as to whether or not a winning combination is completed has been completed. In this case, a lottery result command is set in step S311. The lottery result command is a command transmitted to the sub-control device 80 in order to grasp the result of the determination of the winning combination, and the lottery result command includes data corresponding to the result of the determination of the winning combination. Thereafter, in step S312, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery processing ends.

<Reel control processing>
Next, the reel control processing in step S212 in the normal processing (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, in step S501, a rotation start process for starting rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In the rotation start processing, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in a motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 is performed. By performing this processing, the stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing in step S106 in the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a predetermined rotation speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting up lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The player is notified of the fact.

  Subsequent to the rotation start processing, in a step S502, it is determined whether or not any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process waits until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process advances to step S503 to determine whether the stop button corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been issued. I do. If the stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S502, and waits until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S504.

  The stop command command is a command transmitted to the sub-control device 80 so as to grasp which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated and the stop command has been generated. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

  In step S505, the symbol number of the reached symbol that has reached the base position (the lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop button is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S506, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

  In the slot machine 10, the stop mode for stopping each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to a stop mode in which when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the reaching symbol reaching the base position is directly stopped. A stop mode in which the reel to be slid is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which it is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop after sliding for four symbols There are prepared five stop modes including a stop mode to be stopped. In step S506, a value of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

  Then, in step S507, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the attained symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol actually stopped at the base position is determined. In step S508, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reaching symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If the symbol numbers are equal, a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel in step S509 is performed. Do. Thereafter, in step S510, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the second stop information setting process is performed in step S511, and the process returns to step S502.

  Here, the stop information is information for setting the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to correspond to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12). When the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated to stop, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, “0” to “4”) with respect to the reached symbol that has reached the base position. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

  As processing for setting the stop information, first stop information setting processing executed in step S312 of the lottery processing (FIG. 12) and stop information executed in step S511 of the reel control processing (FIG. 17) There is a second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process. If the stop information set in this case is IV = 1 to 7 in the CB non-internal state, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. If IV = 1 to 7, 9 to 13 in the later state, stop information corresponding to the relationship between the first stop and the winning combination as shown in FIG. 15 is set.

  In the stop information second setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process is changed after the reel stops. In the stop information second setting processing, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop appearance of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. I do. In the slot machine 10, when the winning is made at IV = 1 to 7, 9 to 13 in the CB non-internal state and the CB internal back state (see FIG. 15), the winning data set and the stop command are set. The stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode that is established by the operation sequence of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that have generated the and the stop appearance.

  By the way, the symbols forming the symbol combination corresponding to the first bell winning, the second bell winning, the normal replay winning, the first bell replay winning, the first cherry replay winning, the second cherry replay winning or the first special replay winning are as follows: The corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged so that the maximum number of symbols separated in the circumferential direction is four symbols. In this configuration, the combination of the result of the lottery process and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R indicates the first bell winning, the second bell winning, the normal replay winning, the first bell replay winning, the first cherry replay winning, the first cherry replay winning, In a case where any one of the two cherry replay winning and the first special replay winning is supported, stop information is set so that the winning occurs regardless of the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  In the CB internal rear state, the player wins any small role or replay role in a situation where the CB winning flag is set to "1". In this case, the small role winning corresponding to the winning is performed. Alternatively, the stop information is set so that the replay winning has priority over the CB winning. For example, in the case where the winning is made at IV = 1 in the CB internal rear state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the timing at which the CB winning can be generated, the small winning combination is obtained in relation to the stop information. By selecting the preferential slip number, a small win is generated and a CB win is not generated. Also, for example, when the replay combination is won in the CB internal rear state, even if the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at a timing at which a CB prize can be generated, the replay prize is not executed in relation to the stop information. By selecting the priority slip number, a replay winning occurs and a CB winning does not occur. However, if the lottery result is out of order, there is no hand that gives priority to occurrence over the CB winning, so that a CB winning may occur depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process (FIG. 17), when it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S512, and the process proceeds to step S513. After the winning result command including the data corresponding to the result of the winning determination process is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, the reel control process ends.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the winning determination processing.

  In the winning determination processing, in step S601, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the left reel 32L is grasped, and in step S602, the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the middle reel 32M is determined. The type is grasped, and in step S603, the type of the symbol stopped on the main line ML on the right reel 32R is grasped. When grasping the symbol type, 2-byte data set for each symbol type is read from the main ROM 73. Then, in step S604, as the logical operation processing of the symbol combination, the two-byte data grasped in steps S601 to S603 is AND-processed with the bits of the same order to obtain a 2-byte corresponding to the symbol combination. Derive the data.

  In a succeeding step S605, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte data derived in the step S604 corresponds to any of the winning data. If an affirmative determination is made in step S605, a winning response process is executed in step S606. In the winning handling process, it is determined whether or not the winning flag corresponding to the winning that has occurred this time is set to “1”. If “1” is not set, an abnormal command is output to the sub-control device 80. Set as target. Upon receiving the abnormal command, the sub-MPU 82 executes the abnormal notification corresponding to the illegal winning through the speaker 65 and the image display device 66. When the winning flag is set to "1", if the winning is a small role winning, the number of medals to be paid out is determined on the main side so that medals or virtual medals can be given in the medal payout process. This is set in the payout target counter of the RAM 74. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, in the next step S204 in the normal processing (FIG. 11), a flag setting process for enabling the same number of bets to be set this time is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S607, a bell winning judgment process is executed, and in step S608, a normal replay pressing order judgment process is executed. These processes are processes for switching the ON / OFF state of the AT1 signal output to the hall computer HC through the external terminal board 90. Details of these processes will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S605 or if the process in step S608 is performed, the process proceeds to step S609, and in the current lottery process (FIG. 12), the second special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 or It is determined whether the third special replay winning flag is set to “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S609, the first win setting process is performed in step S610, and then the final winning determination process is ended. If a positive determination is made in step S609, the first weight setting process is performed in step S611. After executing the two-weight setting process, the main winning determination process ends. The first weight setting process and the second weight setting process will be described later.

<CB state processing>
Next, the CB state process executed in step S214 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the CB state by determining whether or not “1” is set in the CB state flag provided in the main RAM 74. If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether the CB winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S702, the present CB state process ends, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether a CB winning has occurred by determining whether the CB establishment flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S703, the present CB state process is terminated as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, the CB status flag is set to “1”, and the CB winning flag and the CB establishment flag are cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S705, "19" is set in a CB counter provided in the main RAM 74. The CB in-progress counter is a counter for specifying, by the main MPU 72, whether or not the number of small winning combinations that has occurred in the CB in-progress state has reached the CB end condition number.

  In a succeeding step S706, “2” is set to a prescribed bet number counter provided in the main RAM 74. Thus, in step S205 of the normal processing (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not the bet number is “2”. Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached “2”, the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated and three or more bets cannot be made.

  In a succeeding step S707, a turning-off process of the internal state notification unit 63 is performed. As a result, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off, and the end of the CB internal state is notified to the manager of the game hall and the player. After that, in step S708, a CB start command including data indicating that the CB state has been started is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the CB state process ends. Thus, the sub-side MPU 82 controls the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like so that an effect corresponding to the CB state is executed.

  On the other hand, when the CB is in the CB state and an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S709 whether or not a small winning combination has been established in the current game. When a negative determination is made in step S709, the present CB state process is terminated as it is, and when an affirmative determination is made in step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, the value of the CB counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by one. Then, in a step S711, it is determined whether or not the value of the CB in-progress counter is “0”. If the value is not “0”, the CB state process is terminated as it is, and if the value is “0”, the process proceeds to steps S712 to S714.

  In step S712, the CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" to end the CB status. In a succeeding step S713, "3" is set to a prescribed bet number counter of the main RAM 74. Thus, in step S205 of the normal process (FIG. 11), it is determined whether the bet number is “3”. Therefore, if the number of bets has not reached "3", the operation of the start lever 41 is invalidated, and bets of four or more cannot be made.

  After that, in step S714, a CB end command including data indicating that the in-CB state has ended is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the CB state processing ends. Thus, the sub-MPU 82 ends the effect corresponding to the CB state on the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like.

<Mode of transition of game state generated under control of main MPU 72>
Next, an aspect of the transition of the game state generated under the control of the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  When the main RAM 74 is initialized, or when the setting is changed in a situation where the CB winning flag is “0”, the state becomes the CB non-internal state ST1. For example, the state becomes the CB non-internal state ST1 when the business of the game hall is started. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the normal replay probability is about 1/7. In the CB non-internal state ST1, no other replay combination is set as a lottery combination. In the CB non-internal state ST1, the CB probability is about 1 / 4.3 and the payout occurrence probability is about 1 / 1.6. However, in the CB non-internal state, the control for the AT state is not executed in the sub-side MPU 82, and it is necessary to correct the stop order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 to 1/4 for the first bell prize. In order to win the second bell, it is necessary to correctly answer the order in which the stop buttons 42 to 44 are pressed in half. Therefore, even if the payout occurrence probability is relatively high at approximately 1 / 1.6, the number of payouts is one. Is basically one. This number is a number smaller than the specified number of three bets.

  If the player wins the CB combination in the CB non-internal state ST1 and does not generate a CB prize, the process proceeds to the CB internal rear state ST2. In addition, the state shifts to the CB internal post-state ST2 even when the setting is changed in a situation where the CB winning flag is “1”. In the CB internal state ST2, the normal replay probability is higher than that of the CB non-internal state ST1, and is about 1 / 2.9. Further, in the CB internal post-state ST2, the replay occurrence probability is higher because the replay combination other than the normal replay combination exists. In the CB internal post-state ST2, the CB winning flag is already set to “1”, and thus the CB combination is not set as a lottery combination.

  In the CB internal post-state ST2, the payout occurrence probability is about 1 / 1.6. Here, in the CB internal post-state ST2, the control for the AT state can be executed in the sub-side MPU 82, as will be described later in detail. In the situation where the control for the AT state is not executed, as in the case of the CB non-internal state ST1, even if the payout occurrence probability is a relatively high probability of about 1 / 1.6, the number of payouts is basically the same. It becomes one sheet. This number is a number smaller than the specified number of three bets. On the other hand, in the situation where the control for the AT state is executed in the sub-side MPU 82, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 for achieving the first bell winning is notified, and the stop for achieving the second bell winning is performed. The pressing order of the buttons 42 to 44 is notified. As a result, in the AT state, the payout occurrence probability is a relatively high probability of about 1 / 1.6, and the number of payouts is basically nine or four. This number is more than the prescribed number of three bets.

  If a CB win has occurred in the CB internal rear state ST2, or if a CB role has been won in the CB non-internal state ST1 and a CB win has occurred in the game, the process proceeds to the CB in-state ST3. In the CB in-state ST3, as described above, a small win or a replay win occurs in each game. However, in the CB in-state ST3, the specified number of bets is limited to “2”, so that even if a small winning combination occurs, the number to be paid out is limited to two. Therefore, in the CB in-state ST3, the medals owned by the player do not decrease, but do not increase. If the small winning combination has occurred 19 times in the CB in-state ST3, the process proceeds to the CB non-internal state ST1.

<Light Emission Control Mode of Internal State Notification Unit 63>
Next, a light emission control mode of the internal state notification unit 63 will be described with reference to a timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 21A shows an execution period of the CB winning game, FIG. 21B shows an execution period of the after-CB state, FIG. 21C shows an execution period of the CB-in-state, and FIG. ) Indicates a light emission period of the internal state notification unit 63.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game won as the CB combination is started. In this case, at the timing of the time t1, as shown in FIG. 21D, the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started. By starting the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 at the start of the game having won the CB role, the player starts a stop operation of at least one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the last stop reel. By this time, it is possible to make the player recognize that the CB combination has been won.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 21A, the game won as the CB combination ends. In this case, since the CB winning has not occurred, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, when a CB winning occurs, the CB inside rear state ends as shown in FIG. 21 (b), and the state shifts to the CB in-state as shown in FIG. 21 (c). Further, at the timing of t3 when the state shifts to the CB in-state, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned off as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the CB in-progress state ends as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game which has won the CB combination is started again, so that the lighting of the internal state notification unit 63 is started as shown in FIG. 21 (d), At the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the game which has been won as the CB combination ends without a CB winning being established, and the state shifts to the after CB state as shown in FIG. 21 (b). .

<First weight setting process>
Next, the first weight setting process executed in step S610 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined in the current lottery process (FIG. 12) whether or not the first special replay winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a number-of-times special lottery process is executed in step S802. In the number lottery process at the first special time, the first number lottery table stored in the main-side ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number-of-times lottery counter periodically (eg, 1.49 msec) is updated in the main-side RAM 74. The data of the bonus AT number corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter is read from the first number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of bonus ATs, the probability that one time is selected is 2/10, and the probability that two times are selected is 5/10. , The probability of three selections is 3/10. Then, in step S803, a value corresponding to the result of the number lottery process in step S802 is set in a bonus AT number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

  In the slot machine 10, as described above, even if the first bell winning flag is set to "1", in order to generate the first bell prize, the answer is correct in the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which become 1/4. Even if the second bell winning flag is set to "1", it is necessary to correct the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44, which are halved, in order to generate the second bell winning. In this case, the display control is executed by the sub-side MPU 82 so that the AT state is entered, so that the correct pressing order is notified on the image display device 66. Therefore, in the AT state, nine or four payouts occur with a high probability. This number is more than the prescribed number of three bets.

  The AT state includes a normal AT state in which the transition and end triggers are not managed in the main MPU 72 but are performed in the sub-MPU 82, and a transition and end trigger are managed in the main MPU 72 and performed in the sub-MPU 82. There is a bonus AT state that cannot be performed. The state shifts to the bonus AT state when a value of 1 or more is set in the bonus AT number counter. The normal AT state will be described later in detail.

  After executing the processing of step S803 in the first weight setting processing, it is determined in step S804 whether the value of the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuations of one bonus AT state by the main MPU 72.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, the first weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S804, the flow proceeds to step S805. In step S805, the pre-start wait flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and in step S806, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74. The wait counter is a counter for measuring the wait time compulsorily set during the game in the main MPU 72, and the wait flag before the start is used to set the set wait time at the end of the set game and at the end of the next game. This flag is used by the main MPU 72 to specify at which timing the game is started at the start of the game.

  After that, in step S807, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the first wait setting process ends. Upon receiving the start weight command, the sub-MPU 82 executes various controls so that the effect corresponding to the start weight is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the value of the CB winning flag is “1” and the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out of order. judge. Incidentally, as already described, the probability that the lottery result is deviated in the after-CB state is 1/65536.

  If a negative determination is made in step S808, the first weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S808, the flow proceeds to step S809. In step S809, a lottery process is performed for the number of times of a miss. In the number lottery process at the time of the departure result, the second number lottery table stored in the main-side ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number-of-times lottery counter periodically (eg, 1.49 msec) is read out in the main-side RAM 74. Then, the data of the bonus AT number corresponding to the value of the number lottery counter is read from the second number lottery table. Specifically, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of bonus ATs, the probability that one time is selected is 1/10, and the probability that two times are selected is 3/10. , The probability of three selections is 6/10. That is, when the second number lottery table is referred to, a larger number of bonus AT times is more easily selected than when the first number lottery table is referred to. Then, in step S810, a value corresponding to the result of the number lottery process in step S809 is set in a bonus AT number counter provided in the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, in step S811, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S811, the first weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if a negative determination is made in step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, "1" is set to the wait generation flag provided in the main RAM 74, and in the following step S813, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. The wait occurrence flag is a flag used by the main MPU 72 to specify that a wait time will occur at the end of the current game. After that, in step S814, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the first wait setting process ends. Upon receiving the start weight command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the first weight-related effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

  As described above, when the first special replay combination is won in the CB internal rear state, or when the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is deviated in the CB internal rear state, the state shifts to the bonus AT state. In particular, when the first special replay combination is won, a prize different from the first special replay prize may occur depending on the stop order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 and the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, but the bonus AT The state shifts to the state regardless of the type of winning that has occurred.

<Second weight setting process>
Next, the second weight setting process executed in step S611 of the winning determination process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The second weight setting process is started when the second special replay winning flag or the third special replay winning flag is set to “1” as described above.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether the output state of the AT1 signal through the external terminal board 90 is ON. The AT1 signal is a signal output from the slot machine 10 to make the hall computer HC recognize whether or not the AT is in the normal AT state. In step S902, it is determined whether the first stop of the current game is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R. If a negative determination is made in step S901 or step S902, the second weight setting process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in both step S901 and step S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, a number lottery process for the second special time is executed. In the number lottery process at the second special time, the third number lottery table stored in the main ROM 73 is read, and the value of the number lottery counter periodically (eg, 1.49 msec) updated in the main RAM 74 is read. The data of the number of bonus ATs corresponding to the value of the number-of-times lottery counter is read from the third number-of-times lottery table. Specifically, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of bonus ATs, the probability that one time is selected is 7/10, and the probability that two times are selected is 2/10. , The probability of being selected three times is 1/10. That is, when the third number lottery table is referred to, a smaller number of bonus ATs is more easily selected than when the first number lottery table and the second number lottery table are referred to. Then, in step S904, a value corresponding to the result of the number lottery process in step S903 is set in the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74.

  Thereafter, in step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. When the affirmative determination is made in step S905, the second weight setting process is terminated as it is, and when the negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906.

  In step S906, "1" is set to a pre-start wait flag in the main RAM 74, and in a succeeding step S907, the value of the start wait time (8 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. Thereafter, in step S908, the start wait command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 80, and then the second wait setting process ends. Upon receiving the start weight command, the sub-side MPU 82 executes various controls so that the first weight-related effect is executed in the speaker 65 and the image display device 66.

  As described above, when the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won in the CB internal rear state, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state, and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R stops as the first stop. The state shifts to the bonus AT state on condition that the operation is performed. However, when the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, even if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first special replay role is performed. A prize different from the replay prize may occur, but the type of the prize generated does not matter when shifting to the bonus AT state.

<Bonus AT management process>
Next, the bonus AT management process executed in step S215 of the normal process (FIG. 11) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is set to the bonus AT state flag provided in the main RAM 74, thereby determining whether or not the bonus AT state is set. By making a negative determination in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the bonus AT management process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003 the bonus AT counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "30", which is the number of continuations of one set, and the bonus AT state of the main RAM 74 is set. Set the flag to “1”. The bonus AT counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuations of one bonus AT state by the main MPU 72. Thereafter, in step S1004, after setting the bonus AT start command as an output target to the sub-control device 80, the bonus AT management process ends. Upon receiving the bonus AT start command, the sub-MPU 82 recognizes that the bonus AT state has started, and sets the contents of the effect on the speaker 65, the image display device 66, and the like to the contents corresponding to the start of the bonus AT state. .

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by one in step S1005. Then, in a step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter is “0”. If it is not "0", the bonus AT management process is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", the flow proceeds to step S1007.

  In step S1007, the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by one, and in subsequent step S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter is "0". If it is "0", the bonus AT state flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S1009, and the bonus AT end flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in step S1010. Is set. The bonus AT end flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72 that the bonus AT state has ended.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1008 or if the process in step S1010 is performed, the value of the end wait time (5 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74 in step S1011. Then, in step S1012, after setting the bonus AT end command as an output target to the sub-control device 80, the bonus AT management process ends. The bonus AT end command includes data corresponding to the value of the bonus AT number counter, that is, data indicating whether a new execution of the bonus AT state is started after the current execution of the bonus AT state is completed. Is included.

  When the sub MPU 82 receives a bonus AT end command including data indicating that a new execution of the bonus AT state is to be started, the speaker 65 performs an effect indicating that the bonus AT state will be continued. And the image display device 66 and the like. On the other hand, when a bonus AT end command that does not include data indicating that a new execution time of the bonus AT state is started is received, the speaker 65 and the image are displayed so that an effect indicating that the bonus AT state is ended is executed. It controls the display device 66 and the like.

  Here, in the normal processing (FIG. 11), if it is determined in step S218 that the end wait time has elapsed, a bonus AT setting processing is executed in step S219. In the bonus AT setting process, the processes of steps S1001 to S1004 in the bonus AT management process (FIG. 24) are executed. That is, when the bonus AT state flag is “0” and the value of the bonus AT number counter is 1 or more, the bonus AT counter is set to “30” and the bonus AT state flag is set to “1”. Then, a bonus AT start command is transmitted to the sub-side MPU 82. As a result, when the bonus AT state is extended, a new execution of the bonus AT state is started from the game immediately after the final game of the execution of the bonus AT state is completed.

  In addition, since the end wait time is interposed between the bonus AT state of one execution time and the bonus AT state of the new execution time as described above, there is a continuous time between each bonus AT state during the extended holiday. A period for executing various operations for the holiday is secured.

<When the first special replay is won or missed>
Next, how the first special replay wins or loses in the CB internal rear state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 25 (a) shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, FIG. 25 (b) shows the execution period of the game when the first special replay has been won or lost, and FIG. 25 (c) shows other games. 25 (d) shows a freeze period, and FIG. 25 (e) shows a wait period.

  At the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 25B, the game in which the first special replay has been won is started, so that a freeze period (39 sec) occurs as shown in FIG. 25D. During this freeze period, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not started. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. Then, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), when the current game ends, the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 25 (a).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 25 (c), so that the wait period set at the end of the previous game is started as shown in FIG. 25 (e). Is done. During this wait period, no bet setting based on the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the bet setting based on the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 25C, the current game ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing t7 when the bonus AT state is continued, as shown in FIG. 25B, the game in which the first special replay has been won is restarted. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period occurs from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, while as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10. No wait period occurs in the next game that continues.

  That is, even if the first special replay win is achieved, a wait period occurs in a situation other than the bonus AT state, but does not occur in a situation of the bonus AT state. Accordingly, when the first special replay winning occurs in a situation other than the bonus AT state, the performance execution period corresponding to the transition to the bonus AT state is secured so as to appropriately enhance the superiority of the player, while the bonus If the first special replay win occurs in the situation of the AT state, it is possible to increase the sense of speed of the game during the bonus AT state by omitting the period.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11 after the end of the bonus AT state, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game in which the lottery result is off is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), a freeze period occurs from the timing of t11 to the timing of t12, and further, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), from the timing of t13 to the timing of t14. A wait period occurs in this game. At the timing t14 when this wait period ends, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the game which resulted in the loss ends, and further, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the bonus AT state starts. Is done. Then, at the timing of t15, as shown in FIG. 25C, a new game is started under the bonus AT state.

<When the second special replay win or the third special replay win>
Next, how the second special replay win or the third special replay win in the CB internal rear state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  26A shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 26B shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 26C shows the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning. 26 (d) shows an execution period of another game, and FIG. 26 (e) shows a wait period.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (c), the game in which the second special replay has been won or the third special replay has been started at timing t1 in the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 26 (a). . Then, at the timing of t2, the game is ended as shown in FIG. 26 (c), so that the normal AT state is ended as shown in FIG. 26 (a), and as shown in FIG. 26 (b). Thus, the bonus AT state is started.

  Thereafter, at a timing t3, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 26D, and as shown in FIG. 26E, a wait period set at the end of the previous game is started. Is done. During this wait period, no bet setting based on the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is not validated. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the wait period ends as shown in FIG. In this case, the bet setting based on the previous replay winning is performed, and the operation of the start lever 41 is validated. Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 26D, the current game ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6 when the bonus AT state is continued, as shown in FIG. 26C, the game in which the second special replay win or the third special replay win is started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t7, and the next game starts at the timing of t8. However, no wait period occurs in the game.

  That is, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win is achieved, a wait period occurs in a situation other than the bonus AT state, but does not occur in a bonus AT state. Thus, when the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning occurs in a situation other than the bonus AT state, the effect execution period corresponding to the shift to the bonus AT state is preferably performed to appropriately enhance the superiority of the player. On the other hand, if the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning occurs in the situation of the bonus AT state, it is possible to increase the sense of speed of the game during the bonus AT state by omitting the period. Becomes

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9 after the end of the bonus AT state and not in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), the game that has won the second special replay or the third special replay has been won. Be started. Then, the game ends at the timing of t10, and, as shown in FIG. 26D, the next game is executed at the timing of t11. However, no wait period occurs in the game. Further, even if the game is over, the transition to the bonus AT state does not occur.

  In other words, even if the second special replay win or the third special replay win is performed in a situation other than the normal AT state, the transition to the bonus AT state is not triggered. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the player staying in the normal AT state, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the normal AT state. In addition, since the wait period is not generated in the situation that does not trigger the transition to the bonus AT state, the production wait period may be generated in a situation where no profit is generated for the player. Is suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Relationship between CB state and bonus AT state>
Next, the relationship between the CB in-state and the bonus AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows the setting status of the CB winning flag, FIG. 27 (b) shows the execution period of the CB state, FIG. ) Shows the execution period of other games, FIG. 27E shows the execution period of the bonus AT state, and FIG. 27F shows the timing at which the number of games is counted.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (a), at the timing t1 when the CB winning flag is set to “1”, a game with a departure result is started as shown in FIG. 27 (b), and the timing of t2 Then, the game is ended. In this case, a CB winning occurs at the end of the game. Therefore, at the timing of the t2, not only the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 27E, but also the CB winning flag is cleared to “0” as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the CB state is also started. In this case, since the CB state is prioritized as the gaming state, the specified number of bets, the content of the lottery process, the reel control mode, and the number of payouts at the time of winning a small combination are set to those in the CB state. . However, the progress of the bonus AT state is not waited, and the number of games executed in the CB state is consumed as the game in the bonus AT state.

  Thereafter, in the CB state and the bonus AT state, the game is executed at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, as shown in FIGS. Is counted. As a result, the digestion of the game in the CB state and the digestion of the game in the bonus AT state occur simultaneously. Then, at the timing of t5, the small role winning is generated 19 times in the CB state, and the CB state ends as shown in FIG. 27B. As a result, only the bonus AT state is set. However, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the CB winning flag is “0” and is in the CB non-internal state, so that the main MPU 72 executes the process of advancing the bonus AT state, but the sub MPU 82 Then, the notification of the pressing order for generating the first bell prize and the second bell prize is not executed.

  Then, at the timing of t6 and the timing of t7, the game is executed in the situation of the CB non-internal state and the bonus AT state as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 27 (f), and the number of games is reduced. Be counted. Then, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 27A, the CB combination is won, and the CB winning flag is set to “1”. As a result, not only the main MPU 72 executes the process of advancing the bonus AT state, but also the sub-MPU 82 performs the notification of the pressing order for generating the first bell prize and the second bell prize.

<Execution control of various notifications and various effects in the sub-side MPU 82>
Next, a processing configuration of the sub-MPU 82 for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

<Periodic processing>
First, a periodic process (eg, a 2 msec cycle) performed by the sub-MPU 82 will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether a new command has been received from the main MPU 72. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the command received this time is stored in a ring buffer provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1102. The ring buffer is a buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands, and executes a process of writing a command to an area indicated by a write pointer, and updates the write pointer each time the write process is executed, and reads out the read buffer. The read processing of the command from the area indicated by the pointer is executed, and the read pointer is updated each time the read processing is executed. The update of the read point is performed when a command is read in one processing cycle of the periodic processing and when the next cyclic processing is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101 or if the process in step S1102 is performed, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the state is after CB internal. The sub-MPU 82 receives the lottery result command corresponding to the winning of the CB from the main MPU 72 and identifies that the CB internal rear state has been started, and receives the CB start command to receive the CB internal command, as described later. Specifies that the after state has ended.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1103, in step S1104, a flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is checked to determine whether the sub-MPU 82 is performing AT control. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1104, non-AT processing is executed in step S1105, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, AT processing is executed in step S1106. The non-AT processing and the AT processing will be described later in detail.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1103, if the process in step S1105 is performed, or if the process in step S1106 is performed, in step S1107, the main MPU 72 sets the freeze period and the wait period. In step S1108, a CB setting process for executing an effect or notification corresponding to the CB-in-progress state while executing a standby effect setting process for executing the corresponding effect or notification. Execute

  Then, in step S1109, display data setting processing for executing an effect or notification by displaying a moving image or a still image on the image display device 66 is executed. In step S1110, the upper lamp 64, the privilege point, and the like are set. A light emission data setting process for executing light emission control of the notification unit 67, the stock notification unit 68, and the victory number notification unit 69 is performed, and in step S1111 sound and voice for effects and notification are output through the speaker 65. Of the sound output data to be performed. Thereafter, the present cycle processing ends.

<Standby effect setting process>
Next, the standby effect setting process in step S1107 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether a lottery result command corresponding to the first special replay winning has been received from the main MPU 72. When the lottery result command has been received, in step S1202, the first freeze flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process ends. By setting "1" to the first freeze flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the first freeze time (39 sec). The data table to be read is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thus, a display effect corresponding to the first freeze time is performed on the image display device 66. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the first freeze time is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the first freeze time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not a lottery result command corresponding to the result of departure has been received from the main MPU 72 in the CB internal rear state. If the lottery result command has been received, in step S1204, the second freeze flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process ends. By setting “1” to the second freeze flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the second freeze time (35 sec). The data table to be read is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the second freeze time is performed on the image display device 66. In the emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the emission data corresponding to the second freeze time is read out, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the second freeze time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1203, it is determined in step S1205 whether a start wait command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the start wait command has been received, in step S1206, "1" is set to the start wait flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and then the standby effect setting process ends. By setting "1" to the start wait flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), data enabling display of a moving image corresponding to the start wait time (8 sec) is set. The table is read from the sub ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thus, a display effect corresponding to the start wait time is performed on the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that the transition to the bonus AT state has occurred is performed. In addition, in the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the start wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28). The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the start wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1207 whether a bonus AT end command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the bonus AT end command has been received, in step S1208, the bonus effect end flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1", and then the standby effect setting process ends. By setting "1" to the bonus AT end flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), it is possible to display a moving image corresponding to the end wait time (5 sec). The data table is read from the sub ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thus, a display effect corresponding to the end wait time is performed on the image display device 66. Specifically, a display effect indicating that one set of the bonus AT state has been completed is performed. In addition, in the emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the emission data corresponding to the end wait time is read, and in the sound output data setting process (step S1111) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the process ends. The sound output data corresponding to the wait time is read out, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the end wait time in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1207, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the extended holiday wait command has been received from the main MPU 72. As will be described later, the extended wait command is a command transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the output state of the AT1 signal set to the ON state is once set to the OFF state and then set to the ON state again. When the output setting of the AT1 signal is performed, the main MPU 72 sets the extended wait time (1 sec).

  If the extended holiday wait command has not been received, the standby effect setting process ends. On the other hand, when the extended wait command has been received, in step S1210, the extended wait flag set in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “1”, and then the standby effect setting process ends. By setting “1” to the extended wait flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a still image corresponding to the extended wait time (1 sec) can be displayed. Is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and a signal is output to the image display device 66 in accordance with the data table. Thus, a display effect corresponding to the extended wait time is performed on the image display device 66.

<CB setting process>
Next, the CB setting process in step S1108 in the periodic process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a winning result command corresponding to CB winning and CB non-winning has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has been received, "1" is set to the CB internal flag provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S1302. This makes it possible for the sub-side MPU 82 to recognize that the state is after CB.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the process in step S1302 is performed, it is determined in step S1303 whether a CB start command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the CB start command has been received, in step S1304, “1” is set in the CB flag provided in the sub RAM 84, and in step S1305, the CB internal flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to “1”. "0" is cleared. As a result, the sub MPU 82 can recognize that the CB is in the CB state.

  Also, by setting “1” to the CB flag, in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the data table that enables display of a moving image corresponding to the CB status is displayed. The data is read from the sub-ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the CB state is performed on the image display device 66. Further, in the emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the emission data corresponding to the CB state is read out, and in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the sound output data setting process (step S1111) uses the CB The sound output data corresponding to the middle state is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect corresponding to the CB state in the image display device 66 are performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1303, or if the process in step S1305 is performed, it is determined in step S1306 whether the CB flag in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". If "1" is set in the CB flag, the effect content updating process is executed in step S1307. In the effect content update process, a process for updating the display of the remaining small role winning number in the CB displayed on the image display device 66 in response to the reception of the winning result command from the main MPU 72 is performed. At the same time, a process for notifying the information of the winning combination is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1306 or if the process in step S1307 is performed, it is determined in step S1308 whether a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the CB end command has not been received, the CB setting process is immediately terminated. If the CB end command has been received, the CB flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0" in step S1309. Then, the CB setting process ends. Thus, the effect corresponding to the CB state in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is ended.

<Process during non-AT in sub-side MPU 82>
Next, a description will be given of the contents of processing during non-AT executed by the sub MPU 82. Prior to the description of the specific processing executed by the sub-MPU 82, the manner of transition from the non-AT state to the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As a mode in which the state is a post-CB internal state and is a non-AT state (hereinafter, referred to as a normal state ST11), a transition is made to a post-CB internal state and a normal AT state (hereinafter, a normal AT state ST12). There are three modes.

  The first transition mode is when the sub RAM 84 is initialized, when the normal AT state ST12 ends and the normal state ST11 is entered, or when the bonus AT state ST17 ends and the normal AT state ST12 is entered. This is a case where the number of ceiling games determined by lottery in the sub-side MPU 82 has been consumed when shifting to the normal state ST11 without shifting. When shifting to the normal AT state ST12 in this mode, the process first shifts to the ceiling game precursor state ST13, and thereafter, the ceiling game number is exhausted (ST14), whereby the normal AT state ST12 is set. The state shifts to the ceiling game precursor state ST13 when the number of ceiling games becomes 32 games remaining. In the ceiling game precursor state ST13, the effect of the transition of the normal AT state ST12 to the normal AT state ST12 is higher than the situation of the normal state ST11 but not the ceiling game precursor state ST13 as the effect of each game on the image display device 66. It is easier to execute.

  Even in a situation where the number of ceiling games is not the remaining 32 games, a false omen state is achieved by winning in the false omen lottery in the sub-MPU 82. In the false omen state, the degree of expectation of the transition to the normal AT state ST12 is greater than the situation in the normal state ST11, which is neither the ceiling game omen state ST13 nor the false omen state, as the effect content of each game on the image display device 66. Is more likely to be performed.

  In the second transition mode, in the activation lottery process executed in response to the winning of the predetermined combination, the game is activated and the transition to the transition chance state ST16 is performed. This is a case where the transfer lottery process executed in response to the transfer lottery results in a transfer winning. However, if the condition for ending the transition chance state ST16 is satisfied without winning the transition, the routine returns to the normal state ST11 without transitioning to the normal AT state ST12. In the transition chance state ST16, a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the transition chance state is ST16 is executed on the image display device 66.

  When shifting to the shift chance state ST16, the process first shifts to the shift chance sign state ST15, and the game shifts to the shift chance state ST16 by exhausting the number of games in the shift chance sign state ST15. In the transition chance sign state ST15, as the effect of each game on the image display device 66, an effect with a higher degree of expectation of transition to the transition chance state ST16 than in the normal state ST11 but not in the transition chance sign state ST15. It is easier to execute.

  Even in a situation in which the transition chance sign state ST15 has not been reached, the false sign lottery in the sub-MPU 82 results in a win, so that a false sign state is obtained. In the false omen state, the degree of expectation of the transition to the transition chance state ST16 is larger than that in the normal state ST11, which is neither the transition chance omen state ST15 nor the false omen state, as the effect content of each game on the image display device 66. Is more likely to be performed.

  The third transition mode is a transition to the bonus AT state ST17 and a transition after the bonus AT state ST17 ends. However, if the bonus AT state ST17 has transitioned under a penalty situation described below, even if the bonus AT state ST17 ends, the routine does not transition to the normal AT state ST12. Note that a transition from the normal AT state ST12 to the bonus AT state ST17 may occur.

<Processing during non-AT>
Next, the non-AT processing in step S1105 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written to the sub RAM 84 in step S1402.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1401, or if the process in step S1402 is performed, it is determined in step S1403 whether a stop command command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the stop instruction command has been received, in step S1404, stop order data is written to the sub RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1403, or if the process in step S1404 is performed, it is determined in step S1405 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the prize result command has not been received, the non-AT in-process is terminated as it is, and if the prize result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1406.

  In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current winning result command corresponds to the shift to the bonus AT state. Specifically, when data indicating that the first special replay combination has been won in the CB internal rear state is specified from the winning result command, or data indicating that the CB internal rear state has resulted in a departure, If it is specified from the winning result command, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406. In addition, data indicating that the player has won the second special replay role or the third special replay role in the CB internal rear state and the AT1 signal is ON is specified from the winning result command. Also, in the case where it is specified that the first stop is the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R by the stop order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84, an affirmative determination is made in step S1406.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, in step S1407, it is determined whether or not data indicating that the player has won the second special replay role or the third special replay role is included in the winning result command. I do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, it means that the current shift to the bonus AT state has occurred under a penalty situation.

  Specifically, as a result of stopping other than the left reel 32L as the first stop even though the sub-side MPU 82 is not in the AT state, the first bell prize or the second bell prize has been generated three times. As will be described later, when the AT1 signal is turned on, and in that situation, the player wins the second special replay role or the third special replay role and stops other than the left reel 32L as the first stop, the main MPU 72 plays a game. The state is shifted to the bonus AT state. However, since this event is a penalty target event, the sub MPU 82 does not set the AT state. Therefore, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1407, "1" is set to the penalty AT flag provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S1408. The penalty AT flag is a flag for specifying in the sub-side MPU 82 that the bonus AT has occurred under the penalty situation.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1407, or if the process in step S1408 is performed, in step S1409, the bonus AT flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “1”, and "4" is set to the provided execution target counter. The bonus AT flag is a flag for specifying in the sub-MPU 82 that the gaming state managed in the main MPU 72 is the bonus AT state, and the execution target counter indicates the processing content to be executed in the AT state. This is a counter to be specified by the side MPU 82. By setting “4” in the execution target counter, the sub MPU 82 executes a process for advancing the bonus AT state. Thereafter, the non-AT in-process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1410 whether a penalty event has occurred. The penalty event is an event in which the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in the CB internal rear state and the non-AT state, and one of the winnings occurs. When a penalty event occurs, there is a possibility that the actual medal awarding rate is higher than the medal awarding rate in the non-AT state set at the design stage of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when a penalty event occurs, a disadvantage is given to the player to urge the user to stop the left reel 32L as the first stop during the non-AT state.

  When a penalty event occurs, image data for penalty is set in the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), and sound output data setting process (step S1111). , Sound output data for a penalty is set. This notifies the player that a penalty event has occurred.

  If a penalty event has occurred, an addition process is performed on a penalty counter provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S1411. In the addition process, “5”, which is a value corresponding to the number of games corresponding to penalty, is added to the value of the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the transition to the AT state is delayed by the value of the penalty counter. Thereafter, the non-AT in-process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1410, a transition chance management process is executed in step S1412, and a ceiling game management process is executed in step S1413. Then, after executing the winning response process in step S1414, the non-AT in-process is terminated. In the prize-winning process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the prize is output through the speaker 65. Execute the processing for performing.

<Transition chance management process>
Next, the transfer chance management processing in step S1412 in the non-AT processing (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The transfer chance management process is started on condition that a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, and thus is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

  First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the value of the transfer chance counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not a transfer chance state is being established. The transfer chance counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the transfer chance state is present and an end timing of the transfer chance state by the sub-MPU 82. If it is not in the transition chance state, it is determined in step S1502 whether or not the value of the transition waiting counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. Is determined. The transition waiting counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the transition chance precursor state is present and the timing of ending the transition chance precursor state by the sub-MPU 82.

  If it is not during the transition chance precursor state, it is determined in step S1503 whether or not the player has won the transition chance trigger. In the case of winning in any of IV = 7, 9 to 12, and 14 to 16 in the internal post-state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the transfer chance is triggered. However, even in the case where the transfer chance is triggered, the affirmative determination is not made in step S1503 if the shift to the bonus AT state is triggered.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1504 whether the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S1505 to S1508 is not performed, and thus no transition opportunity of the transition chance state occurs. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the flow proceeds to step S1505.

  In step S1505, the activation lottery table corresponding to both the current transition opportunity activation trigger and the number of digested games since the previous transition to the non-AT state is read from the sub ROM 83. Then, in step S1506, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is collated with the above-mentioned activated lottery table.

  Here, in the activation lottery table, 0, 1, 2, and 3 times are set as the transfer chance remaining times. In addition, the activation lottery table is configured such that the larger the value of the winning IV is, the higher the probability of selecting one or more transition chance remaining times and the probability of selecting a larger number of transition chance remaining times are. The probability that one or more remaining transfer chances are selected as the number of remaining transfer chances and the probability that a larger number of transfer chance remaining times are selected as the number of digested games since the previous transition to the non-AT state is larger is set. It is set to be high.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether one or more remaining transfer chances has been selected in the activation lottery process in step S1506. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1507, in step S1508, the number of remaining transfer chances selected in the present activation lottery process is added to the remaining transfer chance counter provided in the sub RAM 84. The transfer chance remaining counter is a counter for specifying by the sub-MPU 82 whether or not there is a transfer opportunity to the transfer chance state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1504, if a negative determination is made in step S1507, or if the processing in step S1508 is performed, the sub RAM 84 is determined in step S1509. It is determined whether or not the value of the remaining transfer chance counter is 1 or more. If a negative determination is made in step S1509, the present transition chance management process is ended as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is equal to or smaller than the regulation reference number of 64. The ceiling remaining game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining ceiling games in the sub-side MPU 82. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, the transition chance management process ends without setting the transition chance precursor state. This makes it possible to prevent the transition to the transition chance state immediately before the transition to the normal AT state due to the exhaustion of the number of ceiling games or the occurrence of the event of staying in the transition chance state to occur. The transition to the state is prevented from being compounded.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1510, "10" is set to the transition waiting counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1511, which is the number of continuous games in the transition chance precursor state. As a result, a transition chance sign is brought. After that, the transfer chance management process ends. When the value of the transition waiting counter is 1 or more, the effect content of the image display device 66 is set to the content corresponding to the transition chance precursor state.

  If a transition chance sign has been reached, an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, and the flow advances to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the present transition chance management process is terminated. As a result, in the penalty state, the number of continuous games in the transition chance precursor state is not consumed, and the transition to the transition chance state is delayed.

  If the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the value of the transition waiting counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1 in step S1513, and the value of the transition waiting counter becomes “0” in subsequent step S1514. Is determined. If a negative determination is made in step S1514, the present transition chance management process is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S1514, the process proceeds to step S1515.

  In step S1515, the value of the transfer chance remaining counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by one. In a succeeding step S1516, “10” which is the number of continuous games in the transition chance state is set in the transition chance counter of the sub RAM 84. As a result, a transition chance state is set. After that, the transfer chance management process ends. When the value of the transition chance counter is 1 or more, a display effect is executed on the image display device 66 to clearly indicate to the player that the state is a transition chance state.

  If the transition chance state has been reached, an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, and the flow advances to step S1517. In step S1517, processing during a transfer chance is executed. After that, the transfer chance management process ends.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing processing during a transfer chance.

  First, it is determined in step S1601 whether or not the player has won the expectation improving combination. The expectation degree improving role is the same as the transition chance initiating role determined in step S1503 in the transfer chance management process (FIG. 33). That is, in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), when any one of IV = 7, 9 to 12, and 14 to 16 is won, it is determined that the player has won the expectation improving role. However, even in the case of winning of the expectation improving role, if the transition to the bonus AT state has been triggered, the affirmative determination is not made in step S1601.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, it is determined in step S1602 whether the value of the penalty counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S1603 to S1606 is not executed, so that a setting opportunity for improving the degree of expectation does not occur. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, a transition probability UP lottery process is executed. In the transfer probability UP lottery process, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to increase the transfer winning probability by one step in the transfer lottery process in step S1609 described later. Note that 1/10, 2/10, 3/10, 4/10, and 5/10 are set as the probability of the transfer winning in the transfer lottery process in step S1609. More specifically, the processing content of the transition probability UP lottery process is firstly read out from the sub-side ROM 83, the transition probability UP lottery table corresponding to the present expectation degree improving combination. The transition probability UP lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the probability of the transition probability UP winning. In the transition probability UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read into the above-mentioned transition probability UP lottery table. And collate.

  In step S1604, it is determined whether or not the transition probability UP has been won. If the transfer probability is UP, in step S1605, the transfer lottery table referred to in step S1609, which will be described later, is changed to a table in which the transfer winning probability is one step higher than the current table. As a result, the transition winning probability is increased by one step.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1604, or if the process in step S1605 is performed, a value corresponding to the current winning combination is set in a delay counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1606. The delay counter is a counter for specifying, in the sub-MPU 82, whether to delay the end opportunity of the transition chance state. “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “10” are set as the values set in step S1606, and if the value of the winning IV is “7”, When “1” is selected and the value of the winning IV is “9” or “10”, “3” is selected and when the value of the winning IV is “11” or “12” Is selected, and if the value of the winning IV is "14" or "15", "7" is selected. If the value of the winning IV is "16", “10” is selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, or if the process of step S1606 is performed, it is determined in step S1607 whether or not the normal replay combination has been won. If the normal replay combination has been won, it is determined in step S1608 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. When the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the processing of steps S1609 and S1610 is not performed, and thus the execution of the transfer lottery processing does not occur. On the other hand, if the value of the penalty counter is “0”, the flow proceeds to step S1609.

  In step S1609, a shift lottery process is executed. In the transfer lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the transfer lottery table that is currently read. And collate. Then, it is determined whether or not the transfer has been won in step S1610.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1607, an affirmative determination is made in step S1608, or a negative determination is made in step S1610, in step S1611 the value of the delay counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to 1 or more. It is determined whether or not there is. If the value of the delay counter is 1 or more, the process in the transfer chance is terminated after the value of the delay counter is decremented by 1 in step S1612. If the value of the delay counter is “0”, in step S1613, the value of the transfer chance counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1, and the process during the transfer chance ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1610 that the transfer has been won, the process of setting the transfer to the normal AT state in steps S1614 to S1617 is executed. Specifically, in step S1614, the normal AT flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". The normal AT flag is a flag for specifying that the sub MPU 82 is in the normal AT state.

  In a succeeding step S1615, a continuous game number lottery process at the start of the normal AT is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games. In the normal game start lottery table at the start of the AT, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 5/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are selected. The probability of being selected is 1/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the above-mentioned continuous game number lottery table at the start of the normal AT. Collate against

  In a succeeding step S1616, the value of the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process in the step S1615 is set in a normal AT game counter provided in the sub RAM 84. The normal AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in one set of the normal AT state by the sub-MPU 82.

  In a succeeding step S1617, the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". By setting “0” to the execution target counter, the sub-MPU 82 executes processing for advancing the pre-branch AT state in the normal AT state. After that, the process during the transfer chance is terminated.

<Ceiling game management processing>
Next, the ceiling game management processing in step S1413 in the non-AT processing (FIG. 32) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The ceiling game management process is started on the condition that a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72, and thus is started at the end of each game in the non-AT state.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 32 or less, thereby determining whether or not the ceiling game is a precursor state. If a negative determination is made in step S1701, it is determined in step S1702 whether the value of the penalty counter of the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by one in step S1703, and then the main ceiling game management process ends. In other words, when the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the number of ceiling games is not subtracted even if the game is exhausted.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701 or if a negative determination is made in step S1702, the value of the ceiling remaining game counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by one in step S1704. Then, in step S1705, it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling remaining game counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. If it is not "0", the main ceiling game management process is terminated as it is, and if it is "0", after performing the transition setting process to the normal AT state in steps S1706 to S1709, Then, the main ceiling game management process ends. The processing contents of these steps S1706 to S1709 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1614 to S1617 in the above-mentioned transition chance processing (FIG. 34). Thereby, the state shifts to the normal AT state.

<Process during AT in sub MPU 82>
Next, a description will be given of the contents of processing during AT performed by the sub-MPU 82. Prior to the description of specific processing contents executed by the sub-MPU 82, each gaming state included in the AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As described above, the AT state includes the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22. In any of the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, when the main MPU 72 wins the first bell role or the second bell role in the lottery process (FIG. 12), it is possible to win them. The control by the sub-MPU 82 is performed so that the order of pressing the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. However, in the normal AT state ST21, the start and end are set by the sub MPU 82 instead of the main MPU 72, whereas in the bonus AT state ST22, the start and end are set by the sub MPU 82 instead of the sub MPU 82. This is performed by the side MPU 72.

  Of the normal AT state ST21 and the bonus AT state ST22, the bonus AT state ST22 has only one type of state, whereas the normal AT state ST21 has a pre-branch AT state ST31 and a branch AT state ST32. There are four types of states, a last chance state ST33 and an additional state ST34.

  The pre-branch AT state ST31 is an AT state that continues for the number of continuous games set at the time of the start. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the state is the pre-branch AT state ST31 is executed by the image display device 66. In the pre-branch AT state ST31, the game is completed for the set number of continuous games, and the process shifts to the branch AT state ST32.

  In the branch AT state ST32, a battle effect using the ally character and the enemy character is performed on the image display device 66. In the battle effect, if the remaining set number of times in the normal AT state ST21 is 1 or more, or if the AT continuation lottery process results in AT continuation winning, a victory effect of the ally character or a draw of both characters as a battle effect. An effect is selected, and in other cases, a defeat effect of the ally character is selected.

  When the victory effect or the draw effect is executed, the process returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31, and when the defeat effect is executed, the process shifts to the last chance state ST33. In the last chance state ST33, a resurrection lottery process is executed in accordance with the content of the winning combination of the game in the pre-branch AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32 and the content of the winning combination of the game in the last chance state ST33, and the resurrection winning is achieved. In this case, the state returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31.

  In the pre-branch AT state ST31 and the branch AT state ST32, the state shifts to the additional state ST34 according to the content of the winning combination of the game in these states. When the condition for transition to the additional state ST34 is satisfied in the pre-branch AT state ST31, the game proceeds to the additional state ST34 from the game following the game in which the transition condition is satisfied even during the pre-branch AT state ST31. On the other hand, when the condition for shifting to the additional state ST33 is satisfied in the middle of the branch AT state ST32, the operation shifts to the additional state ST34 after the end of the branch AT state ST32.

  In the additional state ST34, a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the player is in the additional state ST34 is executed by the image display device 66. In the additional state ST34, an additional lottery process is executed in accordance with the winning combination of the game, and the number of sets in the normal AT state ST21 is increased by the additional winning. The transition to the pre-branch AT state ST31 is made when the termination condition is satisfied in the added state ST34.

  In any of the pre-branch AT state ST31, the branch AT state ST32, the last chance state ST33, and the add-on state ST34, the main MPU 72 makes a transition to the bonus AT state ST22 by performing a transition to the bonus AT state ST22. In the bonus AT state ST22, a display effect for clearly indicating to the player that the player is in the bonus AT state ST22 is executed on the image display device 66. When the process shifts to the bonus AT state ST22 in the pre-branch AT state ST31, the process returns to the pre-branch AT state ST31 after the end of the bonus AT state ST22, and the process proceeds to the bonus AT state ST22 in the branch AT state ST32. After the end of the AT state ST22, the process returns to the branch AT state ST32. If the process proceeds to the bonus AT state ST22 in the add-on state ST34, the process returns to the add-on state ST34 after the end of the bonus AT state ST22. On the other hand, when the process shifts to the bonus AT state ST22 in the last chance state ST33, the process shifts to the pre-branch AT state ST31 after the end of the bonus AT state ST22.

<Processing during AT>
Next, the processing during AT in step S1106 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1801, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, the winning combination data corresponding to the lottery result command is written to the sub-side RAM 84 in step S1802.

  Then, in step S1803, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the penalty AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84, and in step S1804, whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the first bell role or the second bell role has been won. If a negative determination is made in both step S1803 and step S1804, and further an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, in step S1806, each stop button for enabling generation of the first bell prize or the second bell prize The pressing order data of 42 to 44 are read from the content of the lottery result command received this time, and written to the sub-side RAM 84.

  That is, in the bonus AT state in which the middle reel 32M or 32R is stopped as the first stop and the second special replay winning or the third special replay winning in a state other than the normal AT state, each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is pressed. Order is not announced. Further, in the normal AT state to which a transition has been made in a situation where a penalty event has occurred, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not notified until the penalty game is over. In addition, since the processing during the actual AT is not executed in a situation other than the CB internal state by executing the processing of step S1103 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is also notified in this case. Not done. On the other hand, in an AT state that is not under a penalty situation, the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified. Accordingly, in the AT state, the degree of expectation of medal provision is higher than in the other gaming states.

  Even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, a bell prize does not occur, but is not treated as a penalty event. That is, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped in the order notified in the AT state, events such as termination of the AT state, temporary suspension of the AT state, and reduction in the probability of winning the normal replay role. Does not occur.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1801, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, when a negative determination is made in step S1805, or when the process of step S1806 is executed. Determines in step S1807 whether a stop instruction command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the stop instruction command has been received, in step S1808, stop order data is written to the sub RAM 84 in order to store the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1807 or if the process in step S1808 is executed, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If a winning result command has been received, a winning corresponding process is executed in step S1810. In the prize-winning process, a process for displaying an image corresponding to the current winning combination on the image display device 66 is executed, and a sound corresponding to the occurrence of the prize is output through the speaker 65. Execute the processing for performing.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1809 or if the process in step S1810 is performed, the value of the execution target counter in the sub RAM 84 is grasped in step S1811. As described above, the execution target counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the AT state by the sub-MPU 82.

  The processing executed by the sub-side MPU 82 in the AT state includes a pre-branch AT state processing for controlling execution of the pre-branch AT state (step S1812) and a branch AT state for performing execution control of the branch AT state. Processing (step S1813), additional state processing (step S1814) for performing additional state execution control, final chance processing (step S1815) for performing final chance state execution control, and bonus AT state And a bonus AT process (step S1816) for performing the execution control in the sub-side MPU 82.

  In such a processing configuration, the execution target counter is a counter for the sub-MPU 82 to know which of the plurality of types of processing is to be executed. In the address table, start addresses of programs for executing the above-described plurality of types of processing are set in correspondence with numerical information of the execution target counter.

  In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the processing for the pre-branch AT state (step S1812), and the start address SA1 is the start of the program for executing the processing for the branch AT state (step S1813). The start address SA2 is the start address of the program for executing the processing for the additional state (step S1814), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing for the last chance (step S1815). The start address SA4 is the start address of the program for executing the bonus AT process (step S1816). Hereinafter, each process of step S1812 to step S1816 will be described in detail.

<Process for AT state before branch>
First, the pre-branch AT state process executed in step S1812 of the AT mid-process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1901, normal replay processing is executed. The processing for normal replay, which will be described later in detail, is processing for generating an opportunity when the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in the main MPU 72 during the extended AT in the normal AT state.

  In the following step S1902, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the bonus AT start command has been received, in step S1903, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to “1” and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to “4”. Thus, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed.

  In the following step S1904, after adding the privilege reference value “7” to the privilege point counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84, the process for the pre-branch AT state is terminated. The privilege point counter is a counter for specifying the number of times of setting in the normal AT state in the sub-side MPU 82. The bonus point counter is incremented when the bonus point lottery is won in the normal AT state and the bonus point lottery process results in a bonus point win. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more), the number of times of setting the normal AT state is n, and even if the current normal AT state ends, the normal AT state is not changed. Will be extended n times.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1902, it is determined in step S1905 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If a winning result command has been received, it is determined in step S1906 whether or not the value of the penalty counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more, the value of the penalty counter is decremented by 1 in step S1907, and then the pre-branch AT state process ends.

  If the value of the penalty counter is 1 or more in the pre-branch AT state, AT preparation data is set in the display data setting process in step S1109 in the periodic process (FIG. 28). An image indicating that preparation is in progress is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the flow advances to step S1908 to execute first additional processing. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the first additional processing.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not a bonus lottery opportunity has been won. In the case of winning in any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal after-state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the privilege lottery opportunity.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, a bonus point lottery process is executed in step S2002. In the privilege point lottery process, a privilege point lottery table corresponding to the current privilege lottery opportunity is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” are set as privilege points, and the greater the value of the winning IV, the greater the value of one or more privilege points. Is set so as to increase the probability of selecting a bonus point having a higher value as the value of the winning IV increases. In the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the privilege point lottery table. I do.

  In a succeeding step S2003, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points have been won. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the number of privilege points that have been won this time is two or more. If a negative determination is made in step S2004, that is, if the privilege point that has been won this time is “1”, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written into the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point that has been won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2001, if a negative determination is made in step S2003, or if the process of step S2005 is executed, the distribution flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S2006. Is set or not. The distribution flag is used to specify in the sub-side MPU 82 that when two or more privilege points are selected in the privilege point lottery process, the two or more privilege points need to be awarded separately for a plurality of consecutive games. Flag.

  If “1” is set in the distribution flag, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written into the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the privilege points distributed to the current game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

  If the number of privilege points that have been won this time is two or more, an affirmative determination is made in step S2004, and the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, distribution lottery processing is executed. In the distribution lottery process, the distribution lottery table corresponding to the current privilege point is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (eg, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. The value of the lottery counter is checked against the distribution lottery table. For example, if the selected bonus point is “2”, the probability of adding 2 to the bonus point counter in the current game is ２, and the bonus point counter is set in each of the current game and the next game. Is 1/2. When the number of selected privilege points is three or more, the addition to the privilege point counter can be distributed over three or more consecutive games including the current game.

  In a succeeding step S2009, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution lottery process is a distribution winning result. That is, it is determined whether or not the addition to the privilege point counter is distributed to a plurality of consecutive games. If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2005 described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the distribution flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “1” in step S2010, and distribution data indicating the distribution mode of the privilege point selected this time is stored in the sub-side RAM 84. Write. Thereafter, in step S2011, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written into the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the privilege points distributed to the current game are added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2006, if the processing in step S2007 is performed, or if the processing in step S2011 is performed, the processing for setting the additional state is performed in step S2012, and then the first additional processing is performed. The process ends.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the setting processing of the additional state.

  In step S2101, a calculation process is performed on the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before stored in the register of the sub-MPU 82 in step S2005, step S2007 or step S2011 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, “7”) in the normal AT state.

  In a succeeding step S2102, a calculation process is performed on the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, “7”) in the normal AT state.

  Thereafter, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2102 is smaller than the value of the remainder derived by the calculation process of step S2101. In a configuration in which the value of the privilege point that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the above-mentioned reference value for addition, the case where the surplus value after addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than before the addition is defined as the privilege point. It means that the privilege point which has been larger than 7 × (n−1) and smaller than 7 × n by the addition of the counter has become 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that an additional number of times of the set in the normal AT state has occurred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process of setting the actual superimposed state is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, “1” is set to the additional state flag provided in the sub RAM 84. In a succeeding step S2105, “2” is set to the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84. By setting “2” in the execution target counter, the additional state processing in step S1814 is executed in the next AT processing (FIG. 37).

  In a succeeding step S2106, a lottery process of the number of compensation replays is executed. In the additional state, the additional number of set times in the normal AT state is more likely to occur. However, the additional state ends when the number of normal replay winnings reaches the number of compensation replays. The lottery process of the number of compensation replays is a process for determining the number of compensation replays, which is a trigger for ending the additional state at the time of transition to the additional state, by lottery.

  In the lottery process of the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table at the time of the addition state is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. The value of the sub-lottery counter is checked against the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table at the time of transition to the added state, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the number of compensation replays, “1” is selected with a probability of 6/10, and a probability of 3/10 is selected. Selects "2", and selects "3" with a probability of 1/10.

  After executing the lottery process of the number of compensation replays in step S2106, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is set in the number of compensation replays counter provided in the sub RAM 84 in step S2107. The compensation replay number counter is a counter for specifying the remaining compensation replay number in the sub-side MPU 82. After that, the setting processing of the actual added state ends.

  Here, as described above, the number of sets in the normal AT state is added according to the privilege points, but as described above, the front door 12 includes points for which the number of bonus points has not been added in the privilege points. A privilege point notifying unit 67 for notifying and a stock notifying unit 68 for notifying the number of times of setting in the normal AT state are provided. The light emission control of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68 according to the privilege point is performed in the notification control process in the emission data setting process (step S1110) of the periodic process (FIG. 28).

  FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the notification control processing.

  In the notification control process, first, in step S2201, a calculation process is performed on the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, “7”) in the normal AT state.

  In the following step S2202, by referring to the stock notification table stored in the sub-side ROM 83, a group corresponding to the quotient of the calculation result in step S2201, that is, the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state is specified. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 41 (b), the stock notification table shows the correspondence between the display color of the stock notification unit 68 and the numerical range of the remaining set count (quotient of the above calculation result) in the normal AT state. Stipulated. Specifically, the remaining set number of 0 corresponds to white, the remaining set number of 1 to 3 corresponds to blue, and the remaining set number of 4 to 6 corresponds to yellow. , 7 to 9 remaining sets correspond to green, 10 to 11 remaining sets correspond to red, and 12 or more remaining sets correspond to rainbow colors.

  In step S2202, it is determined which group the quotient value derived in step S2201 belongs to in the stock notification table. Then, in step S2203, the display color data corresponding to the grasped group is read out from the sub-side ROM 83 and written into the sub-side RAM. Thus, the light emission of the stock notification unit 68 is controlled so that the display color corresponds to the display color data.

  In a succeeding step S2204, the remainder of the calculation result in the step S2201, that is, points for which the number of set points in the privilege points has not been added is specified. Then, the light emission data corresponding to the specified point is written into the sub-side RAM 84, so that the number of unit point display units 67a corresponding to the specified point is turned on. Light emission control is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S2205, the light emission data corresponding to the value of the victory counter provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is written to the sub-side RAM 84, and the unit victory number display portions 69a corresponding to the value of the victory counter are displayed. Light emission control of the victory number notifying unit 69 is performed so as to be turned on. The victory counter is a counter for specifying, by the sub-MPU 82, the number of victory effects in the battle effect in the AT state that continues without being in the non-AT state. Thereafter, the notification control processing ends.

  With reference to FIG. 42, a description will be given of how bonus points are distributed and added to a plurality of games in the pre-branch AT state. FIG. 42A is a timing chart showing how bonus points are distributed and added, FIG. 42A shows an execution period of a game in which bonus points are won, and FIG. 42B shows another game. 42 (c) shows the state of the privilege point counter, and FIG. 42 (d) shows the execution period of the additional state. FIGS. 42 (B1) to 42 (B4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining light emission modes of the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the game in which the privilege point is won is started at the timing of t1 in the state of the pre-branch AT state, and the game is ended at the timing of t2. In this case, if the value of the privilege point counter is already "4", three points are selected as the privilege points to be added, and distribution data to be added one point at a time in three consecutive games including the game is set. Is done. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the value of the privilege point counter increases only by "1". As a result, as shown in FIG. 42 (B2), the number of the unit point display portions 67a in the lighting state on each of the left side and the right side is four, as shown in FIG. 42 (B2). The number of the unit point display sections 67a is five.

  After that, at the timing of t3 and the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), one game is completed, and at each timing, as shown in FIG. The value increases by "1". As a result, in the privilege point notification unit 67, as shown in FIGS. 42 (B3) and 42 (B4), the number of unit point display units 67a that are turned on on each of the left and right sides increases by one. By increasing the value of the privilege point counter in this way, the value of the privilege point counter becomes "7" at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 42 (c). Thereby, the additional state is started from the timing of t5, as shown in FIG.

  In addition, since the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes one by setting the value of the privilege point counter to “7”, the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is changed as shown in FIG. 42 (B4). Specifically, the color becomes blue. Thereby, the player can confirm that the display color of the stock notification unit 68 is blue, thereby grasping that the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more and 3 or less. Become.

  Returning to the description of the processing for the AT state before branching (FIG. 38), after executing the first additional processing in step S1908, the value of the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is "2" in step S1909. It is determined whether or not. When the value of the execution target counter is “2”, it means that the transition to the additional state has occurred as a result of the first additional processing in step S1908. In this case, the pre-branch AT state processing is terminated without executing the processing of step S1910 and thereafter.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1909, the process advances to step S1910. In step S1910, the value of the normal AT game counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by one. Then, in a step S1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1911, the processing for the pre-branch AT state is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1911, the processing for setting the branch AT state is performed in step S1912. The processing for the pre-branch AT state is completed.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the branch AT state.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the value of the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is 7 or more, the value of the privilege point counter is reduced by 7 in step S2302.

  In a succeeding step S2303, a battle lottery process is executed. In the battle lottery process, the battle lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read out from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read. Check against the battle lottery table. In the battle lottery table, a victory effect and a draw effect are set as battle effects, and the probability of a victory effect is １ ／ and the probability of a draw effect is １ ／. .

  In a succeeding step S2304, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The branch AT game counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuous games in the branch AT state by the sub-side MPU 82, and is one of 10 to 13 games in the case of a winning effect, and 10 in the case of a draw effect. Or 11 games. In the battle lottery process, not only one of the victory effect and the draw effect is selected, but also the number of continuous games in the case of the victory effect and the number of continuous games in the case of the draw effect.

  In the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is performed on the sub side. The data is read from the ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed on the image display device 66 over a plurality of games. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data is set in the periodic process (FIG. 28) (step S1111). In), the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in step S2303 is a winning victory. If it is a victory effect winning, in step S2306, the value of the victory counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one. As described above, if the value of the victory counter is incremented by 1 by executing the notification control process (FIG. 41A), the unit victory of the lighting state in the victory number notification unit 69 is adjusted accordingly. The number display section 69a is increased by one.

  In a succeeding step S2307, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after adding 1 is “12”. If “12”, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

  The AT continuation probability is a probability that an AT continuation lottery process is performed in the AT continuation lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the normal AT state in a situation where the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is “0”. is there. Specifically, 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88% are set as the probability of the AT continuous winning. The AT continuation probability that is initially set when transitioning from the non-AT state to the normal AT state differs depending on the mode that triggered the transition to the normal AT state.

  For example, in the case of transition from the transition chance state to the normal AT state, a lottery of the AT continuation probability is performed, so that 50% is selected with a probability of 90/100, and 60% is selected with a probability of 8/100, 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. In addition, when the game shifts to the normal AT state due to the exhaustion of the number of ceiling games, the lottery of the AT continuation probability is performed, so that 50% is selected with a probability of 80/100 and with a probability of 18/100. 60% is selected and 70% is selected with a probability of 2/100. Also, when the player wins the second special replay role or the third special replay role and shifts to the bonus AT state, and then shifts to the normal AT state, 77% is selected, and the bonus is won by winning the first special replay role. 82% is selected when the state shifts to the AT state and thereafter shifts to the normal AT state, and the highest probability is 88% when the state shifts to the bonus AT state after shifting to the bonus AT state and then shifts to the normal AT state. Is selected. In other words, the transition to the normal AT state triggered by the transition to the bonus AT state has a higher AT continuation probability set first than the case of directly transitioning to the normal AT state.

  As described above, the AT continuation probability is set at the time of transition to the normal AT state, but in the normal AT state that is continuous without being in the non-AT state, the victory effect occurs 12 times, which is the predetermined number of executions. In this case, the AT continuation probability is set to 88% of the highest probability. As a result, when a victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so that the player has the victory effect in the battle effect. The game is played while expecting that the game will be played, and the interest of the game is improved.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, an AT continuous lottery process is executed in step S2309. In the AT continuation lottery process, first, the AT continuation lottery table corresponding to the currently set AT continuation probability is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the sub-side RAM 84 periodically updates the sub-side lottery counter (for example, 2 msec). The value is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the AT continuous lottery table.

  In a succeeding step S2310, it is determined whether or not the result of the AT continuation lottery processing is an AT continuation winning. If the AT continuation winning has been achieved, a battle lottery process is executed in step S2311, and in step S2312, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, A flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. The processing contents of steps S2311 and S2312 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2303 and S2304. The content of the battle effect in the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 is the same as the content described in the case of step S2303 and step S2304.

  In a succeeding step S2313, it is determined whether or not the result of the battle lottery process in the step S2311 is a winning effect winning. If it is a victory effect winning, in step S2314, the value of the victory counter in the sub RAM 84 is incremented by one. Then, in a step S2315, it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter is “12”. If the value of the victory counter is “12”, the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability in step S2308.

  On the other hand, when the value of the victory counter is not “12”, the process proceeds to step S2316. In step S2316, an AT continuation probability promotion lottery process is executed. In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is promoted. Check against the lottery table. In the promotion lottery table, the probability of the promotion winning is set to 6/10. Then, in step S2317, it is determined whether or not the result of the promotion lottery process is a promotion winning. If it is a promotion winning, the AT continuation probability is set one step higher in step S2318.

  The promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is executed when the winning effect is achieved in the battle effect as described above, and is not executed when the drawing effect is the draw effect. As a result, when a victory effect is achieved in the battle effect, not only the continuation of the normal AT state is confirmed, but also an opportunity to increase the AT continuation probability is given, so that the player has the victory effect in the battle effect. The game is played while expecting that the game will be played, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is not executed when the normal AT state is continued because the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, and when the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation lottery. Be executed. When the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the continuation of the normal AT state is determined, so that the player can securely confirm the progress of the battle effect. On the other hand, when the AT continuation lottery process is executed, the normal AT state may end when the AT continuation is lost, so the player confirms the progress of the battle effect while expecting a victory effect or a draw effect. Will be done. In this case, the AT continuation lottery process executes the AT continuation lottery by executing the AT lottery process of raising the AT continuation probability on condition that the AT continuation lottery has been achieved and the winning effect has been achieved. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, if AT continuation is lost in the AT continuation lottery process in step S2309 and a negative determination is made in step S2310, the flow advances to step S2319. In step S2319, the value corresponding to the defeat effect is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and the defeat effect flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1".

  In the display data setting process (step S1109) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), a data table that enables the display of a moving image corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter and the type of battle effect is performed on the sub side. The data is read from the ROM 83 and a signal is output to the image display device 66 according to the data table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the selected battle effect is performed on the image display device 66 over a plurality of games. In the light emission data setting process (step S1110) in the periodic process (FIG. 28), the light emission data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the sound output data is set in the periodic process (FIG. 28) (step S1111). In), the sound output data corresponding to the selected battle effect is read, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 64 and the sound output control of the speaker 65 are performed according to the light emission data and the sound output data. As a result, in the upper lamp 64 and the speaker 65, a light emission effect and a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 66 are performed.

  Here, the number of games set in the branch AT game counter when the defeat effect is executed is “10”. On the other hand, the number of games set in the case of the victory effect is 10 to 13 games, and the number of games set in the case of the draw effect is 10 or 11 games. The branch AT state continues over the number of games corresponding to the value set in the branch AT game counter, and during the branch AT state, processing for AT is executed in the sub-MPU 82. Then, in the victory effect or the draw effect, not only the normal AT state is continued but also the period in which the process for AT is executed may be longer than in the case of the defeat effect. Thereby, the advantage of being a victory effect or a draw effect is further increased, and the degree of attention to the battle effect is increased.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, if a negative determination is made in step S2307, if the process in step S2308 is performed, if a negative determination is made in step S2313, if a negative determination is made in step S2317, When the processing of S2318 or the processing of step S2319 is executed, in step S2320, “1” is set to the branch AT status flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and the execution of the sub-side RAM 84 is performed. After setting the value of the target counter to “1”, the main branch AT state setting processing ends. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the processing for the branch AT state in step S1813 is executed.

<Process for branch AT state>
Next, the processing for the branch AT state executed in step S1813 of the processing during AT (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2401, a pressing order avoiding process is executed. The pressing order avoiding process, which will be described in detail later, is for preventing the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the extended AT in the normal AT state does not occur. Processing.

  In the following step S2402, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the bonus AT start command has been received, in step S2403, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to “1”, and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to “4”. Thus, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed.

  In the following step S2404, the battle effect data that has already been set in the current branch AT state is stored and held in the sub RAM 84. The battle effect data stored and retained in this case includes the value of the branch AT game counter set in the pre-branch AT state process (step S1812) when the current branch AT state is started, and the battle effect. The state of the flag corresponding to the type and the control data of the upper lamp 64, the speaker 65, and the image display device 66 from the start game to the end game of the battle effect in the current branch AT state are included. Thereby, when returning to the branch AT state after the end of the bonus AT state, the battle effect of the branch AT state that was performed before the start of the bonus AT state can be restarted from the start. After that, in step S2405, "7" is added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and then the process for the pre-branch AT state is completed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2406 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the main branch AT state processing is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the second additional processing is executed in step S2407. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second additional processing.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not a bonus lottery opportunity has been won. In the case of winning in any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal after-state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the privilege lottery opportunity. If a negative determination is made in step S2501, the second additional processing is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, a bonus point lottery process is executed in step S2502. In the privilege point lottery process, a privilege point lottery table corresponding to the current privilege lottery opportunity is read from the sub-side ROM 83. In the privilege point lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, and “4” are set as privilege points, and the greater the value of the winning IV, the greater the value of one or more privilege points. Is set so as to increase the probability of selecting a bonus point having a higher value as the value of the winning IV increases. In the privilege point lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the privilege point lottery table. I do.

  In a succeeding step S2503, it is determined whether or not one or more privilege points have been won. If a negative determination is made in step S2503, the second additional processing is terminated as it is, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, the flow proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, the value of the immediately preceding privilege point counter is written into the register of the sub-side MPU 82, and the value of the privilege point which has been won this time is added to the privilege point counter.

  In a succeeding step S2505, a calculation process is executed for the immediately preceding privilege point. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter immediately before stored in the register of the sub-side MPU 82 in step S2504 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, “7”) in the normal AT state.

  In a succeeding step S2506, a calculation process is performed on the privilege points currently stored in the privilege point counter. Specifically, the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Then, the read value is divided by the privilege reference value (specifically, “7”) in the normal AT state.

  After that, in step S2507, it is determined whether or not the value of the remainder derived by the calculation processing of step S2506 is smaller than the value of the remainder derived by the calculation processing of step S2505. In a configuration in which the value of the privilege point that can be selected in the privilege point lottery process is smaller than the above-mentioned reference value for addition, the case where the surplus value after addition to the privilege point counter is smaller than before the addition is defined as the privilege point. It means that the privilege point which has been larger than 7 × (n−1) and smaller than 7 × n by the addition of the counter has become 7 × n or more (n is an integer of 1 or more). That is, it means that an additional number of times of the set in the normal AT state has occurred.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2507, the process of setting the actual added state is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2507, in step S2508, "1" is set to the 1-bit additional state transition flag provided in the sub RAM 84, and then the second additional processing is terminated. The additional state transition flag is a flag used by the sub-MPU 82 to specify that the state should be shifted to the additional state after the end of the branch AT state.

  Returning to the description of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), after executing the second addition process in step S2407, the value of the branch AT game counter in the sub RAM 84 is decremented by one in step S2408. Incidentally, every time the value of the branch AT game counter is decremented by 1, in steps S1109 to S1111 in the periodic processing (FIG. 28), the display control data table and the light emission control data for the battle effect set this time are set. The reference range of the table and the sound output control data table is switched to the reference range corresponding to the next game. Thus, each time one game is completed, the effect range of the battle effect is switched to the effect range corresponding to the next game.

  Thereafter, in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the branch AT game counter after subtracting 1 is “0”. If it is not “0”, the branch AT state processing is terminated as it is. If it is “0”, the branch AT state end processing is executed in step S2410, The process ends.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the branch AT state.

  First, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the defeat effect flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “1”, thereby determining whether or not the battle effect executed this time is a defeat effect. If the defeat effect flag is set to "1", it is determined in step S2602 whether the value of the privilege point counter in the sub-side RAM 84 is 7 or more. If it is less than 7, in step S2603, the defeat effect flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the branch AT state flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". In step S2603, “1” is set to the last chance flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84, and “3” is set to the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84. Thus, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the last chance processing of step S1815 is executed. Thereafter, the termination processing of the main branch AT state is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2602 that the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, the value of the privilege point counter is subtracted by 7. In a succeeding step S2605, a battle lottery process is executed. The processing content of the battle lottery processing is the same as the processing content of step S2303 and the processing content of step S2311 in the setting process of the branch AT state (FIG. 43).

  In the following step S2606, a value corresponding to the battle lottery result in step S2605 is set in the branch AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and a flag setting process corresponding to the battle lottery result is executed. In this case, if the victory effect is selected, the branch AT game counter is set to “3” so that the branch AT state is extended by three games, and if the draw effect is selected, the branch AT state is set to one game. "1" is set to the branch AT game counter so as to be extended.

  In other words, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more and the extended AT in the normal AT state is determined in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected as the battle effect, the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. . Then, in the branch AT state, processing for AT is executed. By this, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more in the middle of the branch AT state in which the defeat effect is selected, not only the extended AT in the normal AT state is determined, but also the number of continuous games in the branch AT state is extended. This is advantageous for the player. Then, by using this extended game, a resurrection effect in which a defeat effect is changed to a victory effect or a draw effect is executed, so that the degree of attention in the effect is also increased.

  Further, the number of continuous games extended in the branch AT state is larger in the case where the victory effect is selected than in the case where the draw effect is selected. This makes it possible to increase the degree of advantage when the victory effect is selected, and to increase the sense of expectation that a victory effect will occur.

  In step S2606, the defeat effect flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the resurrection flag provided in the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". The resurrection flag is a flag for specifying by the sub-side MPU 82 that the resurrection of the victory effect or the draw effect has occurred in a situation where the defeat effect has been selected.

  After that, in step S2607, a process for winning effect is executed. In the process for the victory effect, when the victory effect is selected by the battle lottery process in the immediately preceding step S2605, the processes of steps S2306 to S2308 in the setting process of the branch AT state (FIG. 43) are executed. Specifically, when the victory effect is selected, the value of the victory counter in the sub RAM 84 is incremented by one, and it is determined whether or not the value of the victory counter after the increment is "12". If it is "12", the AT continuation probability is set to the highest probability. Thereafter, the termination processing of the main branch AT state is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, it is determined in step S2608 whether or not the resurrection flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not a victory effect or a draw effect has been restored. Also, in step S2609, it is determined whether or not “1” has been set in the additional state transition flag of the sub-side RAM 84, so that the bonus during the branch AT state where the victory effect or the draw effect is selected. It is determined whether or not the value of the point counter has become 7 or more.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S2608 and step S2609, the processing for setting the pre-branch AT state is executed in step S2610, and then the processing for terminating the main branch AT state ends.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the pre-branch AT state.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether or not the battle effect finally performed in the current branch AT state is a victory effect. If it is a victory effect, a continuous game number lottery process at the time of the victory effect is executed in step S2702. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the victory effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the victory effect, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 4/10, and 100 games are selected. Is 5/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (eg, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the victory effect. And collate.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2701 that the game is a draw effect, in step S2703, a continuous game number lottery process at the time of a draw effect is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the draw effect is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the draw effect, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 3/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 5/10, and 100 games are selected. Is 2/10. In the lottery processing, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read into the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the draw effect. And collate.

  When the process of step S2702 or step S2703 is executed, in step S2704, the value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process of step S2702 or the lottery process of step S2703 is set in the normal AT game in the sub RAM 84. Set to counter. After that, in step S2705, the branch AT state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the processing for the pre-branch AT state in step S1812 is executed. Thereafter, the setting process of the pre-branch AT state is completed.

  Returning to the description of the end processing of the branch AT state (FIG. 46), when an affirmative determination is made in step S2608 or step S2609, the processing of steps S2611 to S2614 is executed. In step S2611, "1" is set to the additional state of the sub-side RAM 84, and the branch AT state flag is cleared to "0". In a succeeding step S2612, “2” is set to the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84. By setting “2” in the execution target counter, the additional state processing in step S1814 is executed in the next AT processing (FIG. 37).

  Thereafter, in step S2613, a lottery process of the number of compensation replays is executed, and in step S2614, a process of setting a counter of the number of compensation replays is executed. The processing contents of steps S2613 and S2614 are the same as the processing contents of steps S2106 and S2107 in the setting processing of the additional state (FIG. 40).

<Advance state of branch AT state>
Next, the progress of the branch AT state will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 48 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the progress of the branch AT state, and FIGS. 48 (B1) to 48 (B6) are diagrams simply showing the contents of the battle effect on the image display device 66.

  When the pre-branch AT state (ST41) ends and the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST42), a winning effect (ST43) or a draw effect (ST44) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is extended, and the state returns to the state before branching (ST45). Before shifting to the pre-branch state (ST45), the state may shift to the added state or the bonus AT state.

  When the pre-branch AT state (ST41) ends and the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST51), an AT continuous lottery process (ST52) is executed. As a result, in the case of the AT continuous winning, the victory effect (ST53) or the draw effect (ST54) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is extended, and the state returns to the state before branching (ST45). Before shifting to the pre-branch state (ST45), the state may shift to the added state or the bonus AT state. On the other hand, if the game is not continued in the AT continuous lottery process (ST52), the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect.

  Here, the content of the battle effect will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 48 (B1) to (B6).

  In the battle effect, first, as shown in FIG. 48 (B1), the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are displayed on the image display device 66. In the battle effect, a moving image will be displayed in each game, but if the display content before switching set in each game is reached, the display content before switching until the next game is started Display of a still image is continued.

  Next, only the ally character CH1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (B2), and only the enemy character CH2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 48 (B3). Thereafter, the state of the battle by both characters CH1 and CH2 is displayed as a moving image. Then, in the case of the victory effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B4), a state in which the ally character CH1 has won the enemy character CH2 is displayed. In the case of the draw effect, as shown in FIG. 48 (B5). In the case of a defeat effect, a state in which the ally character CH1 and the enemy character CH2 are defeated by the enemy character CH2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 48 (B6). You.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 48 (A), if the game is not continued in the AT continuous lottery process (ST52) and the defeat effect (ST55) is selected as the battle effect, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 at the end of the defeat effect. It is determined whether or not this is the case. If the value of the privilege point counter is 7 or more (ST61), a resurrection victory effect (ST62) or a resurrection draw effect (ST63) is selected in the battle lottery process. In this case, the normal AT state is extended, and the state returns to the pre-branch state (ST64) after the additional state is performed. On the other hand, if the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7 (ST65), the process shifts to the last chance state (ST66).

  With the above-described configuration, if the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is 1 or more, the extended cottage in the normal AT state is determined. As a result, the normal AT state is extended. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the normal AT state is extended.

  Further, even if the continuous AT lottery process is stopped, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more during the branch AT state, and the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes 1 or more. It will be a consecutive villa. As a result, even if a defeat effect occurs in the branch AT state, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation of continuing the normal AT state.

  Also, even if the continuation of the lottery process is once performed, if the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 or more during the branch AT state and the normal AT state is extended, the subsequent branch AT state is started. If the value of the privilege point counter is less than 7, the AT continuous lottery process is executed again. As a result, an opportunity to execute the AT continuous lottery process is secured before the normal AT state ends, and it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of expectation that the normal AT state will continue.

<How the AT continuation probability increases>
Next, the manner in which the AT continuation probability in the AT continuation lottery process is promoted will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As described above, six types of AT continuation probabilities, 50%, 60%, 70%, 77%, 82%, and 88%, are set. When transitioning to the normal AT state via the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is any of 77%, 82%, and 88%. On the other hand, when directly transitioning to the normal AT state without going through the bonus AT state, the AT continuation probability at the time of the transition is basically 50%.

  In this case, if the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation win, the battle lottery process results in a victory effect prize, and if the AT continuation probability promotion process becomes a promotion prize, the AT continuation probability increases by one level. . In other words, 50% is 60%, 60% is 70%, 70% is 77%, 77% is 82%, and 82% is 88%. As a result, the longer the normal AT state is connected, the higher the probability that the AT continuation probability becomes high, and the normal AT state is more easily connected. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage that the normal AT state is extended.

  Further, when the victory effect occurs 12 times in the normal AT state without intervening the non-AT state, the AT continuation probability is the highest probability irrespective of the probability of the AT continuation probability at that time. Some 88%. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting a victory effect to occur in the battle effect, and the interest in the battle effect is increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Here, when there are two opportunities, that is, the remaining set count and the AT continuous lottery process, as the opportunity for the normal AT status to be extended, the normal AT status is triggered by the fact that the remaining set count is 1 or more. , The battle lottery process is executed, and a victory effect may occur. When the victory effect occurs 12 times, the AT continuation probability of the AT continuation lottery process becomes the highest probability. Accordingly, when there are two opportunities, that is, the remaining number of sets and the AT continuation lottery process, as the opportunity for the normal AT state to be extended, both opportunities are set as to whether or not the AT continuation probability is the highest probability. It becomes possible to relate closely.

  Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a stock notifying section 68 for notifying the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. In the stock notification unit 68, the display color is changed according to the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. Therefore, the player can grasp the number of remaining sets by checking the display color. It is possible to By checking the stock notification unit 68 and grasping the number of remaining sets, the player himself / herself can determine the degree of expectation that the AT continuation probability is the highest probability in relation to the number of executions of the victory effect. Will be grasped. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the expectation that the AT continuation probability becomes the highest probability.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a victory number notifying unit 69 for notifying the number of winning effects. Thus, the player can clearly recognize the number of victory effects by checking the victory number notification unit 69.

<Transition timing of added state>
Next, the transition timing to the additional state in the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  50A shows an execution period of the pre-branch AT state, FIG. 50B shows an execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 50C shows an execution period of the added state, and FIG. Indicates the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of seven.

  As shown in FIG. 50A, the pre-branch AT state is started at the timing of t1, and as a result of each game in the pre-branch AT state, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. The value of the counter becomes 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more). Thus, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (a), and the additional state starts as shown in FIG. 50 (c). That is, in the pre-branch AT state, the state shifts to the additional state at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the additional state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (c), thereby returning to the pre-branch AT state as shown in FIG. 50 (a). In this case, the state returns to the pre-branch AT state with the number of continuous games remaining before shifting to the additional state.

  Thereafter, at the timing t4, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 50A, and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 50B. Then, as a result of each game in the branch AT state, at the timing of t5, the value of the privilege point counter becomes 7 × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more) as shown in FIG. However, at the timing of t5, the branch AT state does not end as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the branch AT state ends, and the additional state starts as shown in FIG. 50 (c). That is, in the branch AT state, the state does not shift to the additional state at the timing when the value of the privilege point counter becomes a multiple of 7 or more, and shifts to the additional state at the end of the branch AT state. This prevents the battle presentation execution form from becoming complicated.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the additional state ends as shown in FIG. 50 (c), whereby the pre-branch AT state is started as shown in FIG. 50 (a).

<Additional processing>
Next, an additional state process executed in step S1814 of the mid-AT process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2801, a pressing order avoiding process is executed. The pressing order avoiding process, which will be described in detail later, is for preventing the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the extended AT in the normal AT state does not occur. Processing.

  In step S2802, it is determined whether a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the bonus AT start command has been received, in step S2803, the bonus AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to “1” and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is set to “4”. Thus, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed. After that, in step S2804, "7" is added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and then, the final addition processing is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2802, it is determined in step S2805 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the final addition state processing is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2806.

  In step S2806, it is determined whether or not a win has been made for an additional lottery opportunity. In the case of winning in any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal after-state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the privilege lottery opportunity.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2806, an additional lottery table corresponding to the current additional mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub-side ROM 83 in step S2807. In the additional lottery table, “0”, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the number of additions. As the additional mode, a first additional mode, a second additional mode, and a third additional mode are set as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52A, and are set when the state shifts to the additional state. In the first additional mode, the additional probability is the lowest, and a small number of additional times is likely to be selected even when an additional occurs. In the second additional mode, which can be shifted from the first additional mode, the additional probability is higher than in the first additional mode, and when an additional occurs, the number of additional times is selected more than in the first additional mode. Easy to do. In addition, the third additional mode, which can be shifted from the first additional mode or the second additional mode, has a higher additional probability than the second additional mode, and in the case where additional addition occurs, the number of times is greater than in the second additional mode. Is easily selected. In addition, the relationship with the winning combination is set so that the larger the value of the winning IV is, the higher the additional probability is, and the larger the value of the winning IV is, the larger the number of additions is. It is set to increase the probability of selection.

  In a succeeding step S2808, an additional lottery process is executed. In the additional lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter updated periodically (for example, 2 msec) is read from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the additional lottery table.

  In a succeeding step S2809, it is determined whether or not the result of the additional lottery processing is an additional winning. If it is an additional winning, in step S2810, 7 × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the privilege point counter. In this case, n is one or more additional times selected in the additional lottery process.

  Here, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 52B, the privilege point counter has a data amount of 1 byte. The bonus point counter is a counter to which a value smaller than a bonus reference value (specifically, “7”) is added when a bonus point lottery process is performed to win a bonus point in the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state. It is. In addition, the bonus reference value is added to the bonus point counter when the bonus AT state is set and the number of remaining sets is added once, and the number of remaining sets is n times (n Is an integer of 1 or more), the value of the privilege reference numerical value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. That is, the privilege point counter is used not only as a counter for cumulatively adding a value less than the privilege reference value, but also as a counter for adding a value when the remaining set number is added. This makes it possible to reduce the number of counters as compared with a configuration in which a counter for cumulatively adding a value less than the privilege reference numerical value and a counter for measuring the number of remaining sets are separately provided. Therefore, in a configuration in which data is handled in byte units, the data capacity can be reduced.

  In addition to the privilege point counter, the value less than the privilege reference value is cumulatively added, and the value of privilege reference value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added, and the number of remaining sets is one or more. In the case where a series of apartments in the normal AT state occurs, the privilege reference value is subtracted from the privilege point counter. As a result, a value related to the addition of the number of remaining sets can be centrally handled in the privilege point counter. Therefore, for example, compared to a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a counter for the number of remaining sets are separately provided and the addition process of the counter for the number of remaining sets is performed according to the value of the privilege point counter, the processing configuration is simplified. It is planned.

  Returning to the description of the processing for the added state (FIG. 51), when a negative determination is made in step S2809 or when the processing in step S2810 is executed, the mode UP lottery processing is executed in step S2811. In the mode UP lottery process, a mode UP lottery table corresponding to the current additional mode and the winning combination of the current game is read from the sub-side ROM 83. For example, in the mode UP lottery table in the first additional mode, an UP winning result for the second additional mode, an UP winning result for the third additional mode, and a departure result are set. In the mode UP lottery table in, an UP winning result for the third additional mode and a departure result are set. In the mode UP lottery table in the third add-on mode, a status-maintenance winning result is set as the mode UP winning, and a status-maintaining departure result is set as the departure result. The mode UP lottery table in the first additional mode and the second additional mode is set such that the larger the value of the winning IV, the higher the mode UP probability. In the mode UP lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the mode UP lottery table. I do.

  In a succeeding step S2812, it is determined whether or not the result of the mode UP lottery process is a mode UP winning. If it is not the mode UP winning, the process for the final addition state is finished as it is, and if it is the mode UP winning, the process proceeds to step S2813. In step S2813, a process for changing the additional mode to a mode one step higher or two steps higher is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the mode is the first additional mode, the mode is changed to the second additional mode or the third additional mode, and when the mode is the second additional mode, the third additional mode is set. And if the third additional mode is set, the third additional mode is maintained.

  Thereafter, in step S2814, a lottery process for the number of compensation replays is performed. As described above, in the additional state, the additional number of set times in the normal AT state is more likely to occur, but the additional state ends when the normal replay winning occurs the number of compensation replays. The lottery process of the number of compensation replays is a process for determining, by lottery, the number of compensation replays that is an opportunity to end the added state.

  In the lottery process of the number of compensation replays, the compensation replay lottery table corresponding to the current additional mode is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read. Then, the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the compensation replay lottery table. In the compensation replay lottery table in the first additional mode, “1”, “2”, and “3” are set as the number of compensation replays, and “1” is selected with a probability of 6/10, and “3” is selected. “2” is selected with a probability and “3” is selected with a probability of 1/10. In the compensation replay lottery table in the second add-on mode, “1” is selected with a probability of 3/10, “2” is selected with a probability of 5/10, and “3” is selected with a probability of 2/10. You. In the compensation replay lottery table in the third additional mode, “1” is selected with a probability of 1/10, “2” is selected with a probability of 3/10, and “3” is selected with a probability of 6/10. You. That is, the second additional mode has a higher additional probability than the first additional mode, and also has a greater number of selections of the compensation replay. In addition, the third additional mode has a higher additional probability than the second additional mode, and also has a larger number of selections of the compensation replay.

  After executing the lottery process of the number of compensation replays in step S2814, the number of compensation replays selected by the lottery process is added to the number of compensation replays counter of the sub-side RAM 84 in step S2815. After that, the setting processing of the actual added state ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2806, it is determined in step S2816 whether or not the normal replay combination has been won. If the normal replay combination has not been won, the final addition state processing ends, and if the normal replay combination has been won, the process proceeds to step S2817.

  In step S2817, the value of the compensation replay number counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is decremented by 1. In step S2818, it is determined whether the value of the compensation replay number counter after the subtraction is "0". If the value is not "0", the process for the actual added state is terminated as it is, and if the value is "0", the flow proceeds to step S2819.

  In step S2819, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is “0”, thereby determining whether or not the added state this time has been changed in the middle of the pre-branch AT state. Is determined. If the value of the normal AT game counter is “0”, it means that the added state this time has shifted at the end of the branch AT state, so that the AT state before branch is newly started. After executing the setting process of the pre-branch AT state in S2820, the process for the additional state is terminated. The processing content of the setting process of the pre-branch AT state is the same as the processing content shown in the flowchart of FIG. However, in step S2705, instead of clearing the branch AT status flag to "0", the additional status flag is cleared to "0".

  If the value of the normal AT game counter is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S2819, and the flow advances to step S2821. In step S2821, the addition state flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the processing for the pre-branch AT state in step S1812 is executed.

<Process for last chance>
Next, the process for the last chance executed in step S1815 of the process during AT (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2901, a pressing order avoiding process is executed. The pressing order avoiding process, which will be described in detail later, is for preventing the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the extended AT in the normal AT state does not occur. Processing.

  In step S2902, it is determined whether a bonus AT start command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the bonus AT start command has been received, in step S2903, the bonus AT flag of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “1”, and the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is set to “4”. The last chance flag in the side RAM 84 is cleared to "0". Thus, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the bonus AT processing in step S1816 is executed. After that, in step S2904, "7" is added to the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84, and then, the final chance process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2905 whether a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the processing for the actual added state is terminated as it is, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2906.

  In step S2906, the resumption lottery table corresponding to the winning combination of the current game and the current value of the privilege point counter is read from the sub ROM 83. The resurrection lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the winning IV is, the higher the resurrection winning probability is, and the larger the value of the current privilege point counter is, the higher the resurrection winning probability is set. Have been.

  In a succeeding step S2907, a resurrection lottery process is executed. In the resurrection lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is checked against the resurrection lottery table.

  In subsequent step S2908, it is determined whether or not the result of the resurrection lottery process is a resurrection winning. If it is a resurrection winning, in step S2909, the continuous game number lottery process at the time of resurrection is executed. In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table at the time of resurrection is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table at the time of resurrection, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 4/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 3/10, and 100 games are selected. Probability is 3/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is stored in the continuous game number lottery table at the time of the resurrection. Collate. Then, in step S2910, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery process in step S2909 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

  After that, in step S2911, the final chance flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0" and the execution target counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the processing for the pre-branch AT state in step S1812 is executed. Further, in step S2911, the privilege point counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". Then, the process for the last chance is completed.

  By clearing the bonus point counter to "0" when the resurrection lottery process results in the resurrection winning, the value of the privilege point counter that has contributed to the resurrection winning is further used in the normal AT state of the subsequent extended destination Is prevented. Therefore, it is possible to limit the generation of the profit by the privilege point.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, the flow advances to step S2912. In step S2912, it is determined whether or not an extension opportunity has been won. In the case of winning in any of IV = 7, 9, 10, 14 to 16 in the internal rear state lottery table (FIG. 14), it is determined that the player has won the extension opportunity. If the extension trigger has not been won, various clearing processes are executed in step S2913. In the various clearing processes, the final chance flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0” and the normal AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the normal AT state ends. Further, the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. As a result, the value of the privilege point counter is inherited between sets in the case where the normal AT state is extended, while the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes “0” and the state shifts to the non-AT state. Does not take over. Further, the victory counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the victory counter is carried over between sets in the case where the normal AT state is extended, but is taken over when the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state becomes “0” and the state shifts to the non-AT state. Not.

  Then, after executing the lottery process of the number of ceiling games in step S2914, the process for the last chance is ended. In the lottery process for the number of ceiling games, the ceiling game lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (eg, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out. Is checked against the ceiling game lottery table. Then, the value selected in the lottery process of the number of ceiling games is set in the ceiling remaining game counter of the sub-side RAM 84.

  If it is determined in step S2912 that the extension opportunity has been won, the final chance process ends. As a result, the last chance state continues. In other words, even if the extended chance is won in the final chance state but the resurrection lottery process does not result in the resurrection winning, the final chance state will continue as a privilege of winning the extended opportunity role. Become. If the player is elected as the extension trigger in the last chance state, the resurrection lottery process will be executed in a manner that the probability of being resurrected will be high, but the resurrection will not be won despite being elected as the extension trigger. In such a case, the player may be discouraged by that much. On the other hand, if you win the extension opportunity, the final chance status will be extended, so it is possible to suppress disappointment if you do not win the resurrection despite winning the extension opportunity It becomes possible.

<Bonus AT processing>
Next, the processing for bonus AT executed in step S1816 of the processing during AT (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S3001, a pressing order avoiding process is executed. The pressing order avoiding process, which will be described in detail later, is for preventing the occurrence of an opportunity to change the output state of the AT1 signal in the main MPU 72 even though the extended AT in the normal AT state does not occur. Processing.

  In the following step S3002, it is determined whether or not a bonus AT end command indicating that the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is “0” has been received from the main MPU 72. The main MPU 72 sends a bonus AT end command when one set of bonus AT state ends even in a situation where the bonus AT number counter is not “0”. In this case, step S3002 No affirmative decision is made.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the bonus AT process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the flow advances to step S3003. In step S3003, the bonus AT flag in the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

  In a succeeding step S3004, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the additional state flag of the sub RAM 84. If the addition state flag is set to “1”, it means that a series of bonus AT states that have been completed this time have shifted in the middle of the addition state, and therefore, in step S3005, the execution target counter After the value is set to “2”, the bonus AT process ends. Accordingly, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the additional state processing in step S1814 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3004, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not “1” is set in the branch AT state flag of the sub RAM 84. If "1" is set in the branch AT state flag, it means that a series of bonus AT states that have been completed this time have shifted in the middle of the branch AT state. After the value of the counter is set to “1”, the bonus AT process ends. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the processing for the branch AT state in step S1813 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3008 whether the normal AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". If the normal AT flag is set to “1”, it means that the series of bonus AT states that have been completed this time have transitioned in the middle of the pre-branch AT state. After the value of the counter is cleared to “0”, the bonus AT process ends. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the processing for the pre-branch AT state in step S1812 is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3008, it is determined in step S3010 whether the penalty AT flag of the sub RAM 84 is set to "1". If a negative determination is made in step S3010, the normal AT flag in the sub-side RAM 84 is set to "1" in step S3011. In a succeeding step S3012, a continuous game number lottery process after the bonus is executed.

  In the lottery process, first, the continuous game number lottery table after the bonus is read from the sub-side ROM 83. As described above, there are 30 games, 50 games, and 100 games as the number of continuous games in one set in the normal AT state. In the continuous game number lottery table after the bonus, the probability that 30 games are selected as the number of continuous games in one set is 1/10, the probability that 50 games are selected is 2/10, and 100 games are selected. Probability is 7/10. In the lottery process, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically (for example, 2 msec) updated in the sub-side RAM 84 is read out, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read from the above-mentioned bonus-after-game bonus lottery table. Collate.

  If the processing in step S3012 has been executed, in step S3013, a value corresponding to the number of continuous games selected in the lottery processing in step S3012 is set in the normal AT game counter of the sub RAM 84. After that, in step S3014, after the execution target counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is cleared to "0", the bonus AT process ends. As a result, in the next AT processing (FIG. 37), the processing for the pre-branch AT state in step S1812 is executed.

  On the other hand, if “1” is set in the penalty AT flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S3010, and the bonus AT processing is terminated as it is. As a result, even if the state shifts to the bonus AT state in a penalty situation, the state does not shift to the normal AT state after the end of the bonus AT state.

<External output from slot machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, the configuration of external output from the slot machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 55A is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electrical configuration of a game hall in which a number of slot machines 10 are installed, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55A, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a number of slot machines 10 are provided for the island facility S. In the island facility S, a data counter DC is provided so as to correspond to each slot machine 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding slot machine 10, and has a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times of execution of a game and a second display for displaying the number of times of execution of a predetermined game state. A unit DC2 and a third display unit DC3 for displaying the number of executions of a specific game state different from the predetermined game state are provided.

  A hall computer HC is provided in the gaming hall as management control means for managing each slot machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and has an MPU 201 mounted therein. The MPU 201 has a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and temporarily stores various data and information input from the slot machine 10 when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. And a RAM 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing.

  The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each slot machine 10 through an electric wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through an electric wiring group EL2. Then, a management process based on the information received from each slot machine 10 is executed, and a signal corresponding to a result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

  Here, a configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the slot machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, the external terminal board 90 is provided with a plurality of external terminals 90a to 90h. A total of eight external terminals 90a to 90h are provided, and the types of information externally output to the hall computer HC are different.

  Specifically, in order to output an insertion signal external terminal 90a used to output information indicating the number of bets of the game for each game, and to output information indicating the number of medals given in each game. An external terminal 90b for a grant signal used for the first game state, an external terminal 90c for a first game state signal used for outputting information indicating that the first game state has started, and a second game state are started. An external terminal 90d for a second game state signal used to output information indicating that the third game state has been started, and an external terminal 90d for a second game state signal used to output information indicating that the third game state has been started. Setting an external terminal 90e and an external terminal 90f for an abnormal signal used to output information indicating that the slot machine 10 has detected the occurrence of an irregularity such as a charging abnormality or a payment abnormality. An external terminal 90g for a setting operation signal used to output information indicating that the changing operation is being performed, and an opening signal used to output information indicating that the front door 12 is being opened. And an external terminal 90h.

  Of these, the number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of bets is output from the input signal external terminal 90a. For example, when the specified number of bet numbers is “2”, a pulse signal is output twice so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec at the start of one game, and the specified number of bet numbers is “2”. In the case of "3", a pulse signal is output three times at the start of one game such that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec. The hole computer HC determines that one game has been started by receiving a group of pulse signals from the input signal external terminal 90a, and displays the number of game executions on the first display unit DC1 of the data counter DC. Is incremented by one.

  The number of pulse signals corresponding to the number of payouts is output from the external terminal 90b for the application signal. For example, when nine medals are provided, a pulse signal is output nine times at the end of one game so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec, and four medals are provided. At the end of one game, a pulse signal is output four times so that the ON time and the OFF time are each 50 msec.

  The external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal is used in the present slot machine 10 to enable the hall computer HC to recognize the number of times of execution of the normal AT state. Hereinafter, the first gaming state signal is referred to as an AT1 signal, and the external terminal 90c for the first gaming state signal is referred to as an external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the normal AT state has newly started by confirming the rise of the signal from the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal, and executes the normal AT state on the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC. The display of the number of times is incremented by one.

  The external terminal 90d for the second gaming state signal is used in the present slot machine 10 to enable the hall computer HC to recognize the number of executions of the bonus AT state. Hereinafter, the second game state signal is referred to as an AT2 signal, and the external terminal 90d for the second game state signal is referred to as an external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal. The hall computer HC determines that the bonus AT state has newly started by confirming the rise of the signal from the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal, and executes the bonus AT state on the third display unit DC3 of the data counter DC. The display of the number of times is incremented by one.

  The external terminal 90e for the third gaming state signal is used in the present slot machine 10 so that the number of executions of the CB state can be recognized by the hall computer HC. From the external terminal 90f for the abnormal signal, the external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal, and the external terminal 90h for the release signal, the ON state is maintained while the respective target events occur.

  The ON signal may be output from the external terminal 90g for the setting operation signal not only during the operation of changing the setting but also during the operation of confirming the current setting value. Further, the configuration may be such that both the abnormal signal and the setting operation signal are output from one external terminal.

  The main-side MPU 72 is electrically connected to the external terminals 90a to 90h of the external terminal board 90 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electric wiring group EL3, and a predetermined voltage is applied to the external terminals 90a to 90h in accordance with a processing result. Output a signal.

<Process for External Output Executed by Main MPU 72>
Next, processing for external output performed by the main MPU 72 will be described. However, in the following description, processing for external output through the external terminal 90c for the AT1 signal and the external terminal 90d for the AT2 signal on the external terminal board 90 will be described.

  First, the external output setting process at the time of termination will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The external output setting process at the time of the end is executed in step S216 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S3101, it is determined whether the state is the inside state of the CB or the state during the CB. When the state is not the CB internal post state or the CB non-internal state, that is, in the CB non-internal state, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3102, and the output state of the AT2 signal is set in step S3103. After setting to the OFF state, the external output setting processing at the end of this operation ends.

  That is, the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal are not set to the ON state in the CB non-internal state, but can be set to the ON state in the CB internal rear state or the CB in-state. Accordingly, the hall computer HC can confirm not only whether the AT 1 signal or the AT2 signal is in the ON state, but also whether the normal AT state or the bonus AT state, but also the CB. It is possible to confirm that the state is the after state inside or the state during CB. In this case, as described above, the slot machine 10 is provided with the internal state notification unit 63 for notifying that the CB winning flag is set to “1”, and the slot machine 10 has the CB winning flag “1”. Is set, the internal state notifying unit 63 is turned on without waiting for the end of the game. On the other hand, the setting of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal to the ON state is performed after the end of the game in which the CB winning flag is set to “1”. Thus, at the timing before the CB internal post state or the CB in-progress state is externally output to the hall computer HC, the slot machine notifies the CB internal post-state or the CB in-progress state in the slot machine 10. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an occurrence of an event that only the manager of the game hall grasps that the state is the inside state of the CB or the state during the CB, and the player cannot grasp the state.

  If the CB is in the CB internal state or the CB state, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the value of the bell winning counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more. The bell winning counter is a counter for specifying, in the main MPU 72, the number of times the first bell winning or the second bell winning has occurred without the pushing order being out of order when the first bell role or the second bell role is won. It is.

<Relationship between Bell prize and output state of AT1 signal>
Here, the bell winning determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The bell winning determination process is executed in step S607 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

  In the bell winning determination process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether the AT2 signal is in the ON state. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, it is determined in step S3202 whether the first or second bell role has been won in the current game. If neither the first bell role nor the second bell role has been won, the main bell prize determination process is terminated as it is, and if the first bell role or the second bell role has been won, the process proceeds to step S3203. .

  In step S3203, it is determined whether or not it has been confirmed that the first bell prize or the second bell prize has occurred as a result of the symbol combination logical operation process in step S604 in the prize determination process (FIG. 18). If the first bell prize or the second bell prize has occurred, in step S3204, the value of the bell prize counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by one, and the bell off flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0". After clearing, the bell winning determination processing ends. If both the first bell prize and the second bell prize have not occurred, in step S3205, "1" is set in the bell off flag of the main RAM 74, and the bell prize counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". After “0” is cleared, the bell winning determination processing ends. The off-bell flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72 that neither the first bell prize nor the second bell prize has occurred in a situation where the first bell role or the second bell role has been won.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3201 that the AT2 signal is in the ON state, the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3206. Thereafter, the bell winning determination processing ends.

  Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), if it is determined in step S3104 that the value of the bell winning counter in the main RAM 74 is 3 or more, in step S3105, the AT1 signal is output. Set the output state to ON.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3104, or if the process in step S3105 is performed, it is determined in step S3106 whether the off-bell flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". If the off-bell flag is set to "1", the output state of the AT1 signal is set to OFF in step S3107, and the off-bell flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3108. .

  The manner in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the bell combination will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 58 (a) shows the execution period of the normal AT state, FIG. 58 (b) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 58 (c) shows the execution of the game that has been won as the first or second bell role. FIG. 58 (d) shows the state of occurrence of the first bell prize or the second bell prize, and FIG. 58 (e) shows the execution period of other games.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (c), at the timing of t1 and the timing of t2, which is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, the game that has won the first bell role or the second bell role is started. . However, since it is not in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not execute the notification control of the pressing order for generating the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination. Therefore, a bell prize does not occur as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at time t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the transition to the normal AT state is performed in the sub-MPU 82, so that the normal AT state is started. At the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), a new game has been started. However, since this game is not a game that has won the first bell role or the second bell role, any bell No prize is generated. However, at the timing t3, the AT1 signal remains OFF as shown in FIG. 58 (b).

  Thereafter, at each of the timings t4 and t6 in the normal AT state, the game in which the first bell role or the second bell role is won is started as shown in FIG. 58 (c). In this case, in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 performs notification control of the pressing order for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. As a result, as shown in FIG. 58D, a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination is generated at each of the timing of t5 and the timing of t7. However, at this timing, since the value of the bell winning counter is “2” and is not 3 or more, the AT1 signal remains OFF as shown in FIG. 58 (b).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), after the game in which neither the first bell role nor the second bell role is won is started, at the timing of t9 after the end of the game. As shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first or second bell role is won is started. In this case, in the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 performs notification control of the pressing order for generating a bell prize corresponding to the winning. Accordingly, at the timing of t10, a bell prize corresponding to the winning combination occurs as shown in FIG. 58 (d). As a result, when the value of the bell winning counter becomes 3 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on at the timing of the time t10, as shown in FIG. 58B.

  Thereafter, at each of the timing of t11 and the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 58 (c), the game in which the first or second bell role is won is started, and a bell prize corresponding to the winning role is generated. I do. Then, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 58 (e), the final game in the normal AT state ends, and as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the end setting of the normal AT state is made in the sub-MPU 82. Done. However, at the timing t13, as shown in FIG. 58B, the AT1 signal remains in the ON state.

  Thereafter, at the timing t14 when the state is neither the normal AT state nor the bonus AT state, the game that has won the first bell role or the second bell role is started. In this case, since the state is not the AT state, the sub-side MPU 82 does not execute the notification control of the pressing order for generating the bell winning corresponding to the winning combination. In addition, in order to generate the first bell prize or the second bell prize, it is necessary to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop, but in either the normal AT state or the bonus AT state. If the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop in a situation where no penalty event has occurred. Then, there is a high possibility that the bell prize will not occur in the game started at the timing of t14. Then, since the corresponding bell prize does not occur despite having won the first bell role or the second bell role, “1” is set in the bell off flag of the main RAM 74 at the timing of t15, and the AT1 signal Is turned off.

  By setting the transition to the normal AT state and the end setting independently in the sub MPU 82, the processing load on the main MPU 72 can be reduced. Further, by making the communication between the main MPU 72 and the sub MPU 82 one-way communication from the main MPU 72 to the sub MPU 82, the chance of inputting an unauthorized signal to the main MPU 72 is reduced. In addition, with the configuration in which the main MPU 72 is externally output to the hall computer HC, the external output can be directly controlled in the main MPU 72 that controls the progress of the game.

  In this case, the main MPU 72 shifts to the normal AT state when a bell prize is generated a plurality of times (specifically, three times) without interfering with the pushing order when the bell role is won. And sets the AT1 signal to the ON state. With this configuration, in the case where various configurations are employed as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the transition to the normal AT state, and outputs a signal indicating the normal AT state. Can be performed.

  The main MPU 72 determines that the normal AT state has ended and sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state when the pressing order is out of order at the time of bell win. With this configuration, in the case where various configurations are adopted as described above, the main MPU 72 indirectly determines the end of the normal AT state and outputs an external output of a signal indicating the normal AT state. It can be terminated.

  Both the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state and the trigger for setting the AT1 signal to the OFF state are whether or not a bell prize has occurred at the time of winning the bell. Thus, the monitoring process for setting the ON state of the AT1 signal and the monitoring process for setting the OFF state of the AT1 signal can be made common, and the processing load can be reduced.

  The number of occurrences of bell prizes at the time of bell election required when setting the AT1 signal to the ON state is set to be larger than the number of occurrences of bell non-winning at the time of bell election required when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. . Thereby, regarding the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, priority is given to setting the AT1 signal to the ON state under the actual normal AT state rather than to performing the setting process earlier, and the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state is performed. It is possible to give priority to performing the setting process to the OFF state earlier than setting to the OFF state when the normal AT state is actually ended. Therefore, the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state can be performed early, while the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state is carefully performed.

  When the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state, the monitoring target is not only the first bell prize but also the second bell prize. As a result, it is possible to increase the timing of setting the ON state and the timing of setting the OFF state.

  In the bonus AT state, the bell winning counter is not added even if a bell winning occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state during the bonus AT state.

  Both the first bell prize and the second bell prize need to stop the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R as the first stop. Thus, it is possible to prevent the AT1 signal from being set to the ON state in a state other than the non-AT state.

<Relationship between normal replay combination and output state of AT1 signal>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the time of termination (FIG. 56), when a negative determination is made in step S3106 or when the process of step S3108 is performed, the external output setting process is provided in the main RAM 74 in step S3109. It is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more. The push order correct answer counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is stopped in the push order determined by the lottery in the main MPU 72 when the normal replay combination is won. It is a counter. The push order lottery process when the normal replay combination is won is executed in step S405 in the winning data acquisition process (FIG. 16) as described above.

  Here, the normal replay pressing order determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The normal replay pressing order determination process is executed in step S608 in the winning determination process (FIG. 18).

  In the normal replay pressing order determination processing, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. As described above, when the normal replay combination is won, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in a stop operation sequence and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in relation to the rotation positions of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Regardless of the timing, a replay win usually occurs.

  If the normal replay prize has not occurred, the normal replay push order determination processing ends, and if the normal replay prize has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, the result of the pressing order lottery process (step S405) executed at the start of the current game is read from the main RAM 74. In a succeeding step S3303, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the current game is read. Then, in step S3304, it is determined whether the result read in step S3302 matches the result read in step S3303. That is, it is determined whether or not each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been stopped in the order corresponding to the result of the pressing order lottery process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the push order correct answer counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by one in step S3305, and then the normal replay push order determination processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3304, the value of the push order correct answer counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S3306, and the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "0". After clearing, the normal replay pressing order determination processing ends. The set flag specifies in the main MPU 72 whether or not the processing corresponding to the value of the push order correct answer counter being 2 or more has already been executed in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the ON state. This is a flag for

  Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the end (FIG. 56), if it is determined in step S3109 that the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more, the AT1 signal is turned on in step S3110. In step S3111, it is determined whether the value of the set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is "1".

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3110 and a negative determination is made in step S3111, the AT1 signal is set to an OFF state in step S3112. In the following step S3113, the extended wait time (specifically, 1 sec) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74. As a result, a negative determination is made in step S218 of the normal processing (FIG. 11), and a wait time corresponding to the extended play wait time occurs at the end of the current game. In step S3113, the set flag in the main RAM 74 is set to “1”. After that, in step S3114, the extended wait command is set to be transmitted to the sub MPU. As a result, the sub MPU 82 sets “1” to the extended wait flag in step S1210 of the standby effect setting process (FIG. 29), as described above, and sets the stationary state corresponding to the extended wait time. The image is displayed on the image display device 66.

  If the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state when the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes 2 or more as described above, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. The setting process is executed in the external output setting process at the start in step S210 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the external output setting process at the start.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether the state is the inside state of the CB or the state during the CB. If the state is not the CB internal post state or the CB in-progress state, that is, if the CB is not in the CB internal state, the external output setting processing at the time of the actual start is terminated.

  If it is in the CB inside state or the CB in state, it is determined in step S3402 whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter of the main RAM 74 is 2 or more. If it is 2 or more, it is determined in step S3403 whether the AT2 signal is in the ON state. If the AT2 signal is not on, the AT1 signal is set on in step S3404.

  As described above, when the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes 2 or more in a situation where the AT1 signal is in the ON state and the AT2 signal is in the OFF state, the AT1 signal is output at the end of the game in which the 2 or more is reached. Is set to the OFF state and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state again at the start of the next game which is started after the extended wait time (1 sec) has elapsed. Such an AT1 signal setting process is executed in order to make the hall computer HC grasp the number of execution sets of the normal AT state when the normal AT state is extended. However, it is impossible for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the normal AT state is connected. Therefore, the OFF / ON setting of the AT1 signal is performed in accordance with the timing at which the connected state in the normal AT state occurs. As described above, the sub-MPU 82 executes the normal replay processing and the pressing order avoidance processing. The normal replay processing and the pressing order avoidance processing will be described below.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a normal replay process in the sub-MPU 82. The normal replay process is executed in step S1901 of the pre-branch AT state process (FIG. 38).

  In the normal replay process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning is included, in step S3503, by grasping the contents of the pressing order command received together with the current lottery result command, the pressing order lottery in the main MPU 72 is determined. The pressing order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written in the sub RAM 84.

  In a succeeding step S3504, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the post-village flag provided in the sub-side RAM 84. The extended-post-flag is a flag for specifying by the sub-MPU 82 that the normal AT state has been extended. The timing at which the post-contest flag is set to "1" is when the victory effect or the draw effect is executed in the branch AT state and the state returns to the pre-branch AT state, and the added state transitioned after the end of the branch AT state ends. And returns to the pre-branch AT state in the last chance state, and returns to the pre-branch AT state in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) in the last chance state.

  If “1” is set in the post-condo flag, in step S3505, the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503 is set as the push order data to be notified on the image display device 66. Thereby, the pressing order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the pressing order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified on the image display device 66, the player generally operates each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the pressing order. Then, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the order selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the order of the pressing, the normal replay winning is generated.

  If “1” is not set in the post-contest flag, in step S3506, it is determined whether the value of the push order correct answer counter provided in the sub RAM 84 is 1 or more. The push order correct answer counter indicates the number of times each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated in the mode selected in the push order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 in the game in which the normal replay role has been won. This is a counter for specifying at.

  If the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more, in step S3507, the push order data different from the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3503 is used as push order data to be notified on the image display device 66. Set. Thus, a pressing order different from the pressing order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the pressing order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified on the image display device 66, the player generally operates each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the order of the pressing, the normal replay winning is generated.

  When a negative determination is made in step S3501, when a negative determination is made in step S3502, when a negative determination is made in step S3506, when the processing of step S3505 is performed, or when the processing of step S3507 is performed, In step S3508, it is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the winning result command has not been received, the normal replay processing ends, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3509.

  In step S3509, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay prize has not occurred, the normal replay processing ends, and if the normal replay prize has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether or not the pressing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pressing order in the current game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, the value of the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one in step S3511. In a succeeding step S3512, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter is 2 or more. If the number is not equal to or more than 2, the normal replay processing is terminated as it is. If the number is equal to or more than 2, the post-consistent flag of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0" in step S3513. The replay processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3510, then in step S3514, the normal replay process ends after the push order correct answer counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0".

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the pressing order avoiding process in the sub-MPU 82. The push order avoiding process includes step S2401 of the branch AT state process (FIG. 44), step S2801 of the additional state process (FIG. 51), step S2901 of the last chance process (FIG. 53), and bonus AT process (FIG. 53). This is executed in step S3001 in FIG.

  In the push order avoiding process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether a lottery result command has been received from the main MPU 72. If the lottery result command has been received, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the current lottery result command includes data corresponding to the normal replay winning combination. If the data corresponding to the normal replay winning is included, in step S3603, by grasping the content of the pressing order command received together with the current lottery result command, the pressing order lottery in the main MPU 72 is determined. The pressing order data corresponding to the result of the process (step S405) is written in the sub RAM 84.

  In the following step S3604, it is determined whether or not the value of the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is 1 or more. If the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more, in step S3605, the push order data different from the push order data written in the sub-side RAM 84 in step S3603 is used as push order data to be notified on the image display device 66. Set. Thus, a pressing order different from the pressing order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) of the main MPU 72 is notified. In the AT state, when the pressing order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified on the image display device 66, the player generally operates each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the pressing order. The stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in an order different from the order selected in the pressing order lottery process (step S405) in the main MPU 72. Even if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped in the order of the pressing, the normal replay winning is generated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3601, if a negative determination is made in step S3602, if a negative determination is made in step S3604, or if the process in step S3605 is executed, the main MPU 72 is determined in step S3606. It is determined whether or not a winning result command has been received. If the winning result command has not been received, the main-push order avoiding process ends, and if the winning result command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3607.

  In step S3607, it is determined whether or not a normal replay winning has occurred in the current game. If the normal replay winning has not occurred, the normal replay processing ends, and if the normal replay winning has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3608. In step S3608, it is determined whether or not the pressing order data stored in the sub-side RAM 84 matches the actual pressing order in the current game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3608, the value of the push order correct answer counter of the sub-side RAM 84 is incremented by one in step S3609. Thereafter, the normal replay processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3608, in step S3610, the push order correct answer counter of the sub RAM 84 is cleared to "0", and then the normal replay processing ends.

  By executing the normal replay process and the pressing order avoiding process as described above, in the pre-branch AT state after the extended AT in the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 determines the game in which the normal replay combination has been won. The pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is notified on the image display device 66. Accordingly, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the notification of the pressing order, the pressing order is correct, so that the main MPU 72 temporarily sets the AT1 signal to the OFF state and then sets the AT1 signal to the ON state again. Is done.

  On the other hand, in a situation in which the game is not in the pre-branch AT state after the extended AT in the normal AT state, the pressing order different from the pressing order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 determined by the main MPU 72 in the game elected as the normal replay combination. The image is displayed on the image display device 66. Accordingly, if the player operates the stop buttons 42 to 44 in accordance with the notification of the pressing order, the pressing order is not correct in a state other than the pre-branch AT state after the extended AT in the normal AT state. The process of once turning the signal OFF and then setting the signal ON again is not executed.

  Also, in a configuration in which the AT1 signal is temporarily turned off and then turned on again by the main MPU 72 when the push order correct answer occurs a plurality of times, before the branching after the extended AT in the normal AT state In a situation other than the AT state, the notification control of the pressing order different from the correct pressing order is executed on the condition that the correct pressing order has occurred once or more. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the push order notification is performed when the normal replay role is won, and it is possible to suppress the push order notification from continuing to be executed in a meaningless manner in the AT state. .

  The manner in which the output state of the AT1 signal is changed in relation to the normal replay combination will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 63 (a) shows the execution period of the pre-branch AT state, FIG. 63 (b) shows the execution period of the branch AT state, FIG. 63 (c) shows the output state of the AT1 signal, and FIG. 63 shows the execution period of the normal replay winning game, FIG. 63 (e) shows the execution period of other games, FIG. 63 (f) shows the execution period of the correct push order notification, and FIG. FIG. 63 (h) shows the setting status of the pressing order correct answer counter in the main RAM 74, and FIG. 63 (i) shows the setting status of the extended wait time.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (d), at each of the timing of t1 and the timing of t2 in the state of the pre-branch AT state as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the game which has won the normal replay combination is started. In this case, it is not after the extended AT in the normal AT state, so that the correct push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further increased as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is "0", the incorrect push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. However, in the game started at the timing of t2, the pressing order of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 happens to be correct, and at the timing of t3 which is the end timing of the game, as shown in FIG. The value of the push order correct answer counter is “1”. At the time t3, the pre-branch AT state ends as shown in FIG. 63A, and the branch AT state starts as shown in FIG. 63B.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4 in the state of the branch AT state, a game different from the normal replay winning combination is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and at the subsequent timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 63 (d). Then, the game which has won the normal replay role is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), since the value of the push order correct answer counter is 1 or more, at the timing of the t5, as shown in FIG. Is done. As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the incorrect pressing order, and at the timing t6, which is the end timing of the game, the pressing order correct answer counter is set to “0” as shown in FIG. Cleared.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7 in the state of the branch AT state, the game which has been won as the normal replay combination is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). In this case, it is not after the extended AT in the normal AT state, so that the correct push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further increased as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is "0", the incorrect push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. Therefore, in the game started at the timing of t7, the pressing order is incorrect.

  Thereafter, at time t8, the other games are ended as shown in FIG. 63 (e), thereby ending the branch AT state as shown in FIG. 63 (b) and at the same time as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Thus, the pre-branch AT state is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the game which has won the normal replay combination is started. In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the extended AT in the normal AT state, the correct push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f). Accordingly, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct answer pressing order, and the value of the pressing order correct answer counter is incremented by 1 at the timing t10, which is the end timing of the game, as shown in FIG. Is done.

  After that, at time t11, other games are executed as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and then at time t12, the game which has been won as the normal replay combination is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). . In this case, since it is the AT state before branching after the extended AT in the normal AT state, the correct push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f). Thus, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the correct answer pressing order, and the value of the pressing order correct answer counter is incremented by 1 at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 63 (h). As a result, the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes “2”, so that the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and the extended wait time as shown in FIG. Measurement is started. Then, the extended holiday wait time elapses at the timing of t14. Thereafter, at the timing of t15, another game is started as shown in FIG. 63 (e), and accordingly, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG. 63 (c).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, the game which has won the normal replay combination is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). In this case, it is not after the extended AT in the normal AT state, so that the correct push order notification is not executed as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and the value of the push order correct answer counter is further increased as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Since it is “2”, the incorrect push order notification is executed as shown in FIG. 63 (g). As a result, in the game, the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the incorrect pressing order, and at the timing of t17, which is the end timing of the game, the pressing order correct answer counter is set to “0” as shown in FIG. Cleared.

  As described above, when the normal AT state is extended, the execution control of the correct push order is performed in the sub-MPU 82 so as to prompt the correct push order at the time of the normal replay combination winning. Even if the main MPU 72 does not directly understand that the extended AT setting in the normal AT state has been performed, the normal MPU 72 is in the main MPU 72 through the occurrence of the correct push order multiple times when the normal replay role is elected. It is possible to indirectly grasp the occurrence of the extended villa. This makes it possible for the main MPU 72 to turn off the AT1 signal once and then turn it on again in accordance with the extended AT in the normal AT state.

  In the sub-side MPU 82, when the normal replay combination is won in a situation that does not correspond to the normal AT state connected apartment, the execution of the improper pushing order notification is intentionally performed, so that the normal AT state is not in the extended state. Nevertheless, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correct answer in the pressing order at the time of normal replay combination winning occurs a plurality of times. Thus, the control of turning the AT1 signal off once and then turning it on again can be easily executed at the time of the extended AT in the normal AT state.

  When the AT1 signal is temporarily turned OFF and then turned ON again during the extended AT in the normal AT state, the OFF state is set before the measurement of the extended wait time, and the ON state is set to the ON wait time. This is performed after the measurement. By setting the extended wait time in this manner, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. In addition, it is possible to secure a period in which the hall computer HC recognizes that the AT1 signal is in the OFF state.

  Note that, when the value of the push order correct answer counter becomes 2 or more and the AT1 signal is set to OFF after being set to OFF, the value of the push order correct answer counter may be cleared to “0”.

<Relationship between bonus AT state and output state of AT1 signal and AT2 signal>
Returning to the description of the external output setting process at the time of termination (FIG. 56), if a negative determination is made in step S3109, a negative determination is made in step S3110, an affirmative determination is made in step S3111, or a step S3114 is performed. If the process has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3115. In step S3115, it is determined whether or not the bonus AT state is being executed by determining whether or not “1” is set in the bonus AT state flag provided in the main-side RAM 74. If "1" is set in the bonus AT state flag, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3116.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3115, or if the process in step S3116 is performed, it is determined in step S3117 whether the wait occurrence flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”. It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) is out of order in the inside state of CB. If "1" is set in the wait generation flag, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state and the wait generation flag is cleared to "0" in step S3118.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3117 or if the process in step S3118 is performed, it is determined in step S3119 whether or not the value of the bonus AT counter in the main RAM 74 is “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one set of the bonus AT state ends. If the value of the bonus AT counter is not "0", the external output setting process at the end of this operation is terminated as it is, and if the value of the bonus AT counter is "0", AT2 is determined in step S3120. After the signal is set to the OFF state, the external output setting processing at the end of this operation ends.

  Next, in the external output setting process at the start (FIG. 60), the processing content executed in relation to the bonus AT state and the output state of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal will be described.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3402, an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, or if the process of step S3404 is performed, “1” is set to the bonus AT end flag of the main RAM 74 in step S3405. By determining whether or not the bonus AT state has been set, it is determined whether or not one set of the bonus AT state has ended and the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state has reached “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3406.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3405 or if the process in step S3406 is performed, it is determined in step S3407 whether or not the value of the bonus AT number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more. Then, it is determined whether or not a situation in which a new set in the bonus AT state is started. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the external output setting process at the time of the actual start is terminated, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3408. The external output setting process at the time of the start is ended.

  Next, the external output setting process before the start will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The external output setting process before the start is performed in step S206 of the normal process (FIG. 11).

  In step S3701, it is determined whether the state is the inside state of the CB or the state during the CB. If the state is not the CB internal post state or the CB in-progress state, that is, if the CB is not in the CB internal state, the external output setting process before the start of the main process is terminated.

  If it is in the CB internal post state or the CB in-progress state, it is determined in step S3702 whether the pre-start wait flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The situation in which the wait flag before start is set to "1" is, as described above, a case where the first special replay combination is won in the CB internal rear state. In addition, other than that, in the state after the CB and the AT1 signal is ON, the second special replay role or the third special replay role is won and the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop. This is the case when the operation is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the external output setting process before the start is completed, and if an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the flow proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state. After that, in step S3704, the pre-start wait flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and then the external output setting process before the start is completed.

  Next, an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the normal AT state triggered by the bonus AT state will be described with reference to a timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 65A shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 65B shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 65C shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. FIG. 65 (e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 65 (f) shows the execution period of the other games, and FIG. 65 (g). Indicates the setting status of the wait period.

  At timing t1, which is neither normal AT state nor bonus AT state, a game that triggers transition to the bonus AT state is started as shown in FIG. 65 (e), and the game is started at timing t2. finish. In this case, the bonus AT state is started at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 65 (d).

  After that, at the timing t3, which is the timing immediately after the bonus AT state is started, another game is started as shown in FIG. 65 (f). ), A wait period (8 sec) is set. This wait period elapses at the timing t4, and at the timing t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, a wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), and the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. 65 (d). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t7, when the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65 (f).

  Thereafter, at time t8, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 65 (f). In this case, the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is one or more. Therefore, at the timing t8, the bonus AT state is set again as shown in FIG. 65 (d), and the AT2 signal is set again to the ON state as shown in FIG. 65 (b).

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t10, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 65 (g), and the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. 65 (d). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Then, at the timing of t11, when the wait period elapses as shown in FIG. 65 (g), the current game ends as shown in FIG. 65 (f). In this case, since the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is “0”, as shown in FIG. 65 (f), at the timing of t12, which is the timing at which a new game is started, as shown in FIG. As shown, the normal AT state is started, and the AT1 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG.

  As described above, even when the bonus AT state is extended, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state each time one set of the bonus AT state ends, and the bonus AT state of a new set is started. The AT2 signal is set to the ON state again. Further, even in the case where the bonus AT state is extended as described above, a wait period occurs. By setting the wait period in this manner, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state at the end of one game and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state at the start of the next game. It is possible to secure a period during which the computer HC recognizes that the AT2 signal is in the OFF state. In addition, during this wait period, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the extended AT state in the image display device 66 or the like.

  When the bonus AT state occurs, the state shifts to the normal AT state after the bonus AT state ends. In this case, when the bonus AT state ends and the normal AT state is entered, not only the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state, but also the AT1 signal is set to the ON state. As described above, when the condition for shifting to the normal AT state is satisfied, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state without waiting for three occurrences of the bell prize, so that the AT1 signal is set when the normal AT state is started. The setting of the signal to the ON state can be performed early.

  Next, an output mode of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal in the case of shifting to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state will be described with reference to a timing chart of FIG.

  66A shows the output state of the AT1 signal, FIG. 66B shows the output state of the AT2 signal, FIG. 66C shows the execution period of the normal AT state, and FIG. FIG. 66 (e) shows the execution period of the game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state, FIG. 66 (f) shows the execution period of other games, and FIG. 66 (g) Shows the setting status of the wait period, and FIG. 66 (h) shows the occurrence status of the bell prize.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (e), at the timing t1 when the AT1 signal is in the ON state as shown in FIG. 66 (a) and the normal AT state as shown in FIG. 66 (c). Then, a game that triggers the transition to the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t2 when the game ends, the normal AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66 (c), while the bonus AT state starts as shown in FIG. 66 (d). At the time t2, the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at time t3, another game is started as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement of the wait period (8 sec) is started at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Then, when the wait period elapses at the timing of t4, the AT2 signal is set to the ON state as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 66 (f), the final game of the current set in the bonus AT state is started. Then, at the timing of t6, the wait period (5 sec) is set as shown in FIG. 66 (g), and the bonus AT state ends as shown in FIG. 66 (d). As shown, the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state. Further, at the timing of the t6, the normal AT state is restarted as shown in FIG. However, the AT1 signal is maintained in the OFF state as shown in FIG. 66 (a), and this OFF state is maintained after the timing t7 when the wait period has elapsed as shown in FIG. 66 (g). Will be maintained.

  Thereafter, in the normal AT state, as shown in FIG. 66 (h), a bell prize is generated at each of the timing of t8, the timing of t9, and the timing of t10, and as shown in FIG. , The AT1 signal is set to the ON state.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A privilege point counter is provided in the sub RAM 84, and the privilege points are won in the privilege point lottery process, and the selected privilege points are added to the privilege point counter. Then, when the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference value, the normal AT state is extended. In addition, when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied, the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is added. The number is added. In this case, if the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied, or if an additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process, the bonus reference value is not stored in the bonus point counter but stored in the bonus point counter. In this configuration, information corresponding to × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added. Therefore, the privilege point counter can be commonly used in the configuration in which the extended AT mode in the normal AT state is diversified as described above. This makes it possible to consolidate the storage areas to be referred to when determining whether or not the normal AT state should be extended, and to reduce the processing load at the time of the determination. Further, in a configuration in which data is handled in units of one byte, the required storage capacity can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which a privilege point counter and a counter for the number of remaining executions are provided in units of bytes.

  In the case of winning the privilege lottery opportunity, one privilege point is selected from the plural kinds of privilege points by the privilege point lottery process, so the privilege point is triggered by winning the privilege lottery opportunity. It is possible to diversify the manner of addition. In addition, since the privilege points selected in this case are all smaller than the privilege reference numerical value, the accumulation of privilege points results in the occurrence of the extended AT in the normal AT state. It is possible to gradually increase the degree of expectation of performing a cottage.

  When the normal AT state is extended, privilege points corresponding to the privilege reference value are subtracted from the privilege point counter. Thus, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is used in common, it is possible to standardize the treatment of privilege points when generating an extended AT in a normal AT state, thereby reducing the processing load.

  In a situation where the privilege point is a value larger than the privilege reference value × (n−1) and smaller than the privilege reference value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more), the privilege point exceeds the privilege reference value × (n−1). Information corresponding to the minute value is reported by the privilege point reporting unit 67. As a result, the player can play the game while clearly recognizing how many privilege points are required to generate the normal AT state extended play, and the player's expectation can be improved. Can be increased. In this case, the bonus point notifying unit 67 notifies the remaining number obtained by dividing the bonus point by the bonus reference value. Thus, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is used in common, it is possible to derive the value of the privilege point reported by the privilege point reporting unit 67 with a simple processing configuration.

  In the situation where the privilege point is a privilege standard numerical value × n or more and a numerical value smaller than the privilege standard numerical value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more), information corresponding to the n is provided by the stock notification unit 68. Be informed. As a result, the player can recognize the remaining number of times of execution in the normal AT state, and the superiority of the player can be appropriately enhanced. In this case, the stock notification unit 68 notifies the quotient value obtained by dividing the privilege point by the privilege reference value. Thus, in a configuration in which the privilege point counter is used in common, it is possible to derive the number of remaining executions of the normal AT state to be notified by the stock notification unit 68 with a simple processing configuration.

  When the privilege point is equal to or larger than the privilege reference value in the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state, the state shifts to the additional state. Then, in the added state, a situation may occur in which the value of the privilege reference numerical value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is added to the privilege point counter. This makes it possible to relate these states closely.

  When the pre-branch AT state or the pre-branch AT state ends, if the privilege point is equal to or more than the privilege reference value, in a configuration in which the normal AT state is extended, in the situation where the privilege point is less than the privilege reference value, When the normal AT state is extended according to the continuation condition, the privilege points less than the privilege reference numerical value are held in the normal AT state of the extended holiday destination. As a result, the opportunity for the privilege points to be equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value increases, and it becomes possible to generate many opportunities for expecting whether the privilege points can be equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value. Further, according to the present configuration, it is possible to enjoy the benefit of the privilege point acquired even before the end of the pre-branch AT state or the branch AT state. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player expect the establishment of the privilege point acquisition condition regardless of the timing of the pre-branch AT state and the branch AT state. Furthermore, according to the present configuration, it is possible to increase the profit in the case where the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that the normal AT state is extended.

  When the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning, not only the normal AT state is extended, but also when the privilege point is equal to or more than the privilege reference value, the normal AT state is extended. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of expectation of a player who expects the normal AT state to be extended.

  When the normal AT state is extended, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect in the branch AT state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting a victory effect or a draw effect to be executed, thereby improving the interest of the game. Further, when the number of executions of the victory effect becomes the predetermined number of executions (12 times), the probability of the AT continuous winning becomes the highest probability regardless of the probability of the AT continuous winning at that time. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the winning effect will be performed.

  In addition, since the victory effect is executed even when the normal AT state is extended because the remaining number of executions is one or more, the number of executions of the victory effect increases as the number of remaining executions increases. The degree of expectation as the number of executions is increased. Therefore, when a large number is set as the number of remaining executions, not only the advantage that the number of extended houses in the normal AT state increases, but also the advantage that the possibility that the AT continuous winning is high increases is provided. As a result, the advantage of setting a large number of remaining executions is increased.

  The number of executions of the victory effect is reported by the victory number reporting unit 69. Thereby, it is possible to suitably increase the sense of expectation that the number of executions of the winning effect becomes the predetermined number of executions.

  Since the remaining number of times of execution of the normal AT state is notified by the stock notification unit 68, it is possible to make the player recognize at least how long the normal AT state is extended through the stock notification unit 68. It is possible to enhance the sense of superiority. Further, the player himself / herself can recognize the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the victory effect will be the predetermined number of executions in relation to the remaining number of executions obtained by the stock notification unit 68. As a result, it is possible to closely associate the consecutive villas in the normal AT state related to the remaining number of times of execution with the probability of AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process, and the effect of setting the double villa mode Can be made synergistic.

  When the number of remaining executions in the normal AT state is 1 or more, priority is given to the remaining executions, and the AT continuous lottery process is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the normal AT state from being extended unnecessarily, as compared with a configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted in the case where the continuation is lost in the AT continuation lottery process.

  When the normal AT state is extended, the probability of the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process may increase. Thereby, when the normal AT state is extended, the extended arrangement is more likely to occur, and the advantage that the normal AT state is extended is increased. Therefore, it becomes possible to enhance the sense of excitement of the player when the normal AT state is extended, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  If the AT continuation lottery process results in an AT continuation lottery, the AT continuation probability promotion process is executed, and the promotion continuation lottery increases the probability of the AT continuation lottery. As a result, the player's attention to whether or not an AT continuation win is made in the AT continuation lottery process is increased. In addition, by executing the promotion continuation lottery process of the AT continuation probability in this manner, it is possible to set the probability of the promotion continuation winning in the promotion lottery process independently of the probability of the AT continuation winning. As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the probability is increased.

  In the branch AT state, a battle effect corresponding to whether or not the extended AT in the normal AT state occurs is performed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a notification as to whether or not the extended AT state is in the extended AT state as an effect. It becomes possible and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, when the victory effect is executed as the battle effect, there is a high possibility that the probability of the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process is high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting a victory effect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  When the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning, a victory effect or a draw effect is executed as a battle effect, and when the victory effect is executed as the battle effect, the promotion process of the AT continuation probability is executed and the promotion is performed. The promotion winning in the lottery process increases the probability of the AT continuous winning. In this case, if a victory effect or a draw effect is performed as a battle effect, the normal AT state villa is determined, so the player must perform a game while expecting the victory effect or the draw effect to be performed. Becomes In addition, when a winning effect is executed out of the winning effect and the draw effect, there is a possibility that the probability of winning the AT continuation is high, so the player expects that a further winning effect is executed. A game will be played. As a result, it is possible to make the player's sense of expectation multi-stage, and the interest of the game is improved.

  When the normal AT state runs in a row because the remaining number of times of execution of the normal AT state is 1 or more, the promotion lottery process of the AT continuation probability is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the chance of being set as the promotion winning in the promotion lottery process from being increased more than necessary.

  Even if the AT continuation lottery process results in a loss of AT continuation, if the bonus points exceed the privilege reference value in the situation where the defeat effect is executed in the subsequent branch AT state, the normal AT state is extended. . As a result, even if the privilege points cannot be equal to or greater than the privilege reference value before the end of the pre-branch AT state, the extended AT in the normal AT state is more likely to occur when the privilege points are larger. Attention to the acquisition of the privilege point is increased.

  Even in the case where the AT continuation lottery processing is performed, even if the AT continuation is not performed, the AT continuation lottery processing is executed again after the consecutive villas in a configuration in which the normal AT state is extended by satisfying another continuation condition. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the timing at which the extended apartment in the normal AT state ends, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the player's expectation in the normal AT state.

  When the AT continuation lottery process is executed by the AT continuation lottery process and the normal AT state is extended and the AT continuation lottery process is executed because other continuation conditions are satisfied when the AT continuation lottery process is performed, May be more likely to be AT continuous winnings. This makes it possible to increase the probability that the normal AT state will be extended even if an event that results in AT continuation being missed in the AT continuation lottery process, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The probability of the AT continuation lottery in the AT continuation lottery process increases as the AT continuation lottery process becomes a continuous lottery, and the number of executions of the victory effect is predetermined even if the AT continuation lottery process does not become the continuous lottery It increases as the number of executions (12 times) increases. As a result, there is a high probability that an AT continuation win will occur in both the case where the AT continuation is won in the AT continuation lottery process and the normal AT state continues to be extended and the case where the AT continuation is lost and the normal AT state continues. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the normal AT state being connected to each other, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Even if the privilege points are not equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value and the AT continues to be lost in the AT continuation lottery process, the normal AT state is extended by the resurrection lottery process in the last chance state. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the normal AT state is extended, and to provide more opportunities for the normal AT state to be extended. In this case, the probability of the resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process differs depending on the privilege point. Thereby, even if the privilege point is less than the privilege reference value, the privilege point affects the probability of being revived in the resurrection lottery process, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the privilege point. In particular, the larger the value of the privilege point, the higher the probability of resurrection winning. Therefore, even in a situation where the privilege point cannot be equal to or more than the privilege reference value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to privilege point acquisition.

  Regardless of whether the normal AT state is extended due to the AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process, or the normal AT state is extended due to the privilege point being equal to or more than the privilege reference value, If the remaining privilege points are taken over to the normal AT state of the extended villa, if the resurrection lottery process results in a resurrection win, the privilege point counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, it is possible to limit the profit of obtaining privilege points to some extent. In addition, there are cases where the privilege points are handed over and cases where the privilege points are not handed over according to the type of event that triggered the extended AT in the normal AT state, and the mode of handing over the privilege points is diversified. . Therefore, the progress of the game is diversified in relation to the privilege points, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The probability of the resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process varies depending on not only the privilege points but also the winning combination in the game. As a result, points to be noted in performing the resurrection lottery process are diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the case of winning the extension opportunity in the last chance state, the last chance state is extended. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player when the resurrection lottery process does not result in the resurrection lottery despite the fact that the resurrection lottery process has been won.

  The transition to the normal AT state may occur based on the normal replay winning in the transition chance state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the normal replay winning in the transition chance state, thereby improving the interest of the game. In this case, if the player is elected as the expectation improving role in the transition chance state, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state increases. Accordingly, in the transition chance state, it is expected that not only the replay combination but also the expectation improvement combination will be won, and the combinations expected to be won will be diversified. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  If the player is elected as an expectation enhancer, the transition chance state is extended. As a result, when the expected degree improving combination is won, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state increases. In addition, when the player wins the expectation improving role and further becomes the transfer probability UP in the transfer probability UP lottery process, the probability of the transfer win in the transfer lottery process increases. As a result, when the expected degree improving combination is won, the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state increases.

  The probability of winning the normal replay role is higher than the probability of winning the expectation improving role. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency of the normal replay combination winning in the transition chance state, and it is possible to provide many opportunities for expecting the transition to the normal AT state. In addition, in the case of winning a role with a low winning probability, it is common that an advantageous situation for the player may occur, but when the winning probability improving role with a lower probability of winning than the normal replay role is generally won. In this case, since the degree of expectation that the transition to the normal AT state occurs becomes higher, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the player is elected as the expectation improving part.

  The normal replay combination is a transition trigger to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but is not a transition trigger to the normal AT state in other game states. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the normal replay winning in the transition chance state. In addition, the expectation improving role does not serve as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in the transition chance state, but serves as a trigger for transition to the normal AT state in other gaming states. As a result, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the expectation improving role is an advantageous role, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning the expectation improving role.

  If the first to third special replays are won or if the result is out of the lottery process, the start wait time is set at the end of the game, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the next game is started. Waiting. Then, when the start wait time is set, the bonus AT state is started. In this case, the start of the bonus AT state can be emphasized by setting the start wait time. As a result, the player feels the surprisingness that the start wait time is set, and the exhilaration of the start of the bonus AT state is enhanced. On the other hand, during the bonus AT state, the player is conscious of the progress of the game, and if the start wait time is set in the middle of the game, the player may think that it is troublesome. On the other hand, in such a situation, since the start wait time is not set, it is possible to prevent such an inconvenience from occurring.

  Further, even if the player wins the second special replay combination or the third special replay combination, the system does not shift to the bonus AT state if the penalty event is generated. If the start wait time is set in such a situation, the player may feel uncomfortable. However, in such a situation, the start wait time is not set, so that such an inconvenience should not occur. Becomes possible.

  If the first special replay combination is won or if the lottery process results in a loss, a freeze time is set at the start of the game. When the lottery results are obtained, the start of the bonus AT state or the increase in the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state surely occurs. This allows the player to feel unexpected about the setting of the freeze time and elevate the mood, and to perform the stop operation of the game while recognizing the lottery result. Becomes Further, such a function of the freeze time can occur regardless of whether or not the player is in the bonus AT state. Therefore, even when the player is in the bonus AT state, the function can be suitably generated by setting the freeze time. It becomes possible.

  The main MPU 72 intentionally selects the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, 32R should be stopped when the normal replay wins, in which the normal replay wins, regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The side MPU 82 executes control for notifying the selected stop order when the normal AT state is extended. Then, on the basis of the fact that the selected stop order and the actual stop order match, the main MPU 72 performs output setting for the external output of the AT1 signal corresponding to the extended AT in the normal AT state. Accordingly, even if the sub-MPU 82 independently manages the progress of the normal AT state, the sub-MPU 82 does not need to transmit information from the main MPU 72 and supports the extended AT in the normal AT state. The external output setting can be performed in the main MPU 72.

  The main MPU 72 always executes the push order lottery process for selecting the stop order when the normal replay combination is won. Accordingly, there is no need to switch between a situation in which the pressing order lottery process is performed and a situation in which the push order lottery process is not performed, and thus the processing configuration is simplified.

  The normal replay combination is the combination with the highest winning probability in the normal AT state. Then, by using the normal replay combination to grasp the extended AT in the normal AT state, when the extended AT in the normal AT state occurs, the main MPU 72 can grasp this early. .

  The main MPU 72 responds to the normal AT state of the external output of the AT1 signal when an event occurs in which the selected stop sequence and the actual stop sequence coincide with each other a plurality of times when the normal replay combination is won. Make the output settings that you have made. This reduces the possibility that the output setting is performed when the coincident event occurs by chance. In particular, the main-side MPU 72 sets the output setting when the coincident event occurs a plurality of times without occurrence of an event in which the selected stop sequence does not coincide with the actual stop sequence when the normal replay role is won. Therefore, the possibility that the output setting is performed when the coincident event occurs by chance is greatly reduced.

  The normal replay combination is a combination in which a prize is generated irrespective of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop sequence of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the rotational position of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. . Thereby, since the profit of the player does not change depending on whether or not the stop order is notified, it is unlikely that there is a restriction in notifying the stop order.

  The stop order selected when the normal replay combination is won does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L first. In a situation in which the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, so that the stop order is selected as described above, so that when the normal replay role is won. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an event in which the selected stop order matches the actual stop order is accidentally generated.

  The sub-MPU 82 can notify a stop order different from the stop order selected by the main MPU 72 when the normal replay combination is won in a situation where a normal AT-state connected suite does not occur. As a result, it is possible to positively prevent an event in which the selected stop sequence matches the actual stop sequence when a normal replay win has been won. Accuracy can be improved.

  When an event in which the selected stop order matches the actual stop order occurs a plurality of times when the normal replay combination is won, the main MPU 72 outputs the AT1 signal to the normal AT state for the external output. In the configuration in which the corresponding output setting is performed, the sub-MPU 82 notifies a stop order different from the selected stop order when the coincident event occurs once. This makes it possible to reduce the frequency at which the notification of the stop order is executed.

  In each of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the sub MPU 82 controls the execution of the pressing order notification for generating the bell prize, so that the processing load on the main MPU 72 is reduced. In this case, the main MPU 72 does not judge the termination timing of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, but determines the termination timing of the bonus AT state. As a result, in the bonus AT state of the bonus AT state and the normal AT state, the main MPU 72 can set the end wait time for enhancing the effect of the effect, thereby reducing the processing load of the main MPU 72. It is possible to enhance the effect while producing.

  In the bonus AT state, only the transition triggered by the result of the lottery process of the role occurs, whereas in the normal AT state, not only the transition triggered by the result of the lottery process of the role in the transition chance state, but also the transition of the ceiling game. There are also transitions triggered by digestion. Thus, a plurality of types of transition patterns in the normal AT state are set while reducing the processing load on the main MPU 72 by limiting the transition pattern in the bonus AT state in which the transition control is performed by the main MPU 72. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

  More patterns are set in the normal AT state than in the bonus AT state. As a result, in the bonus AT state in which the continuation control is performed by the main-side MPU 72, the processing load of the main-side MPU 72 is reduced by limiting the continuation-condition establishment pattern. By setting a plurality of types, it is possible to diversify the game.

  In a configuration in which, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the winning combination when the first bell role or the second bell role is won, a bell prize is generated, The AT1 signal is set to the ON state based on the fact that the main MPU 72 specifies that a bell prize has occurred when the two-bell role is won. Thus, even if the sub MPU 82 independently manages the progress of the normal AT state, it is not necessary to transmit information from the sub MPU 82 to the main MPU 72, and the output setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state is not required. Can be performed.

  The main MPU 72 sets the output of the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bell prize occurs a plurality of times. This reduces the possibility that the output setting to the ON state is performed when the bell prize occurs by chance. In particular, the main MPU 72 performs the output setting when a bell prize occurs multiple times without occurrence of an event in which a bell prize does not occur despite having won the first bell role or the second bell role, The possibility that the output setting is performed when a bell prize occurs by chance is greatly reduced.

  The stop order for enabling the bell prize when the first or second bell role is won does not include the stop order for stopping the left reel 32L first. In a situation in which the stop order is not notified, the player generally stops the left reel 32L first, and thus, by selecting the stop order as described above, there is a possibility that a bell prize may occur by accident. It becomes possible to reduce.

  When a bell prize does not occur despite having won the first bell role or the second bell role, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to an OFF state. Thus, in both cases where the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state, the main MPU 72 may monitor whether or not a bell prize has occurred. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load is reduced.

  The number of occurrences of the bell prize, which triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state, is greater than the number of occurrences of the out-of-order pressing at the time of winning the bell role, which triggers the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state. This makes it possible to accurately set the AT1 signal to the ON state while enabling the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state early when the normal AT state ends.

  When the AT1 signal is set to the ON state and when the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state, there are two types of winning combinations to be monitored, a first bell combination and a second bell combination. As a result, it is possible to generate many occasions for setting each output while increasing the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each combination.

  When the winning state of the CB combination is maintained, a transition to the normal AT state occurs. This makes it possible to limit the period during which the transition to the normal AT state is possible in relation to the winning combination, and to note that the player wins the CB combination and maintains the winning state of the CB combination. Becomes Therefore, novel game contents can be provided.

  In the CB state, the medals (or virtual medals) possessed by the player do not increase. In this case, when the winning combination of the CB combination is reached, the prize is shifted to an inconvenient CB state when the prize is generated, while the shift to the normal AT state may be generated by not generating the prize. There is. As a result, it is possible to make the profit of the player greatly different depending on whether or not to generate the CB winning, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the CB combination.

  In the CB state, the medal (or virtual medal) possessed by the player does not increase, but does not decrease. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player who has unintentionally generated a CB winning.

  An internal state notification unit 63 that is turned on when a CB combination is won is provided. This makes it possible to urge the player not to generate a winning when the winning state of the CB combination is achieved.

  In the configuration in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the normal AT state is set, and the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in the main MPU 72 when the bonus AT state is set. , The internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the ON state of the AT1 signal and the ON state of the AT2 signal are set. Thus, it is possible to notify the player that the winning state of the CB combination has been notified to the outside of the slot machine 10.

  When the CB combination is won, the internal state notification unit 63 is turned on before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of the winning of the CB combination before the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is started in the game, and it is possible to avoid occurrence of a CB winning.

  When the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied or when a CB win occurs in the bonus AT state, the game content in the CB state is prioritized, and the game executed in the CB state is continued in the bonus AT state. It is treated as the digest of the number of games. As a result, the player plays the game so that the CB winning does not occur when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied or in the bonus AT state. Therefore, the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed carefully, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, as compared with a configuration in which the bonus AT state is simply invalidated, the bonus AT state and the CB state can be associated with each other, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Even if the CB-in-progress state is terminated, the state does not immediately return to the bonus AT state, but returns to the bonus AT state when the CB combination is won. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the CB combination after the end of the CB state, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, the game amount required until the winning state of the CB combination is reached is treated as the consumed amount of the continuous game number in the bonus AT state. As a result, after the end of the CB state, the player plays the game while expecting to win the CB role by the time the game of the number of continuous games in the bonus AT state is completed, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the setting mode of the AT1 signal when the state shifts to the bonus AT state when the AT1 signal is in the ON state. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the AT1 signal and the AT2 signal executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the setting process is executed instead of the external output setting process at the end (step S216) in the normal process (FIG. 11).

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether a condition for shifting to the bonus AT state has been satisfied. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether the output state of the AT1 signal is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3802, “1” is set to the halfway transition flag provided in the main RAM 74 in step S3803. The midway transition flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72 that the state has shifted to the bonus AT state while the AT1 signal is in the ON state. After that, in step S3804, the output state of the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state. If a negative determination is made in step S3802 or if the process in step S3804 is performed, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the ON state in step S3805.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3806 whether the bonus AT state has ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, the output state of the AT2 signal is set to the OFF state in step S3807. In subsequent step S3808, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the halfway transition flag of the main RAM 74. If "1" is set, the AT1 signal is set to the ON state in step S3809.

  When the processing of step S3805 is executed, when a negative determination is made in step S3806, when a negative determination is made in step S3808, or when the processing of step S3809 is executed, other processing is performed in step S3810. Execute. In other processes, the processes of steps S3101 to S3114 and steps S3401 to S3404 in the first embodiment are executed. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the state shifts to the bonus AT state while the AT1 signal is in the ON state, the AT1 signal set to the OFF state at the time of the shift to the bonus AT state is used when the bonus AT state ends. It is set to the ON state again. If the game is shifted to the bonus AT state in the middle of the normal AT state, the remaining continuation game in the normal AT state at that time is held, and if the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state is restarted from the state of the remaining continuation game. You. In this case, if a configuration is used in which the AT1 signal is set to the ON state on the condition that the bell prize has occurred a plurality of times in the same manner as in the case of transition from the non-AT state to the normal AT state, the bell prize may occur multiple times. There is a possibility that the normal AT state ends without the AT1 signal being set to the ON state because the remaining continuous game is exhausted. On the other hand, in the situation where the bonus AT state ends and returns to the normal AT state as described above, by setting the AT1 signal to the ON state when the bonus AT state ends, the normal AT state after the return is restored. The AT1 signal can be set to the ON state before the state ends.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the state of the last chance state is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the last chance state executed by the sub-MPU 82. Note that the setting process is executed when shifting to the last chance state.

  First, in step S3901, the value of the privilege point counter is grasped. In a succeeding step S3902, the value of the obtained privilege point counter is set to a continuing game counter provided in the sub-side RAM. The continuous game counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining continuous games in the last chance state in the sub-MPU 82.

  After that, in step S3903, the resumption lottery table corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter grasped in step S3901 is read from the sub ROM 83. The resurrection lottery table is set so that the larger the value of the privilege point counter is, the higher the probability of resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process is. Then, the process of setting the last chance state ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the probability of a resurrection win in the resurrection lottery process increases according to the value of the privilege point counter, but also the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter. As a result, the importance of the value of the privilege point counter is increased, and the expectation of winning the privilege lottery trigger during the normal AT state is increased.

  Note that, instead of setting the value of the privilege point counter as it is in the continuous game counter, the number of continuous games corresponding to the value of the privilege point counter may be set in the continuous game counter. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of stages are set according to the range of the value of the privilege point counter, and the number of continuous games corresponding to the stages is set in the continuous game counter. Further, the number of continuous games corresponding to doubling the value of the privilege point counter, the number of continuous games corresponding to doubling the value of the privilege point counter, or the number of continuous games corresponding to a predetermined integer multiple of 4 or more is set. Is also good.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing content when the normal AT state ends is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the end processing of the normal AT state executed by the sub MPU 82. The end processing is executed when the last chance state ends without winning the resurrection.

  First, in step S4001, a bonus point holding lottery process is executed. In the holding lottery processing, the holding lottery table is read from the sub-side ROM 83, the value of the sub-side lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) is read from the sub-side RAM 84, and the value of the sub-side lottery counter is read. Check against the held lottery table. The holding lottery table is set, for example, so as to be held with a probability of 1/2.

  In a succeeding step S4002, it is determined whether or not the result of the holding lottery processing in the step S4001 is a holding winning. If the winning is not a holding win, the privilege point counter is cleared to "0" in step S4003, and then the end processing of the normal AT state is ended. If the holding is a winning, the value of the benefit point counter is maintained as it is. The normal AT state end processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the normal AT state ends in a situation where the number of remaining sets is “0”, the value of the privilege point counter may be transferred to the next normal AT state. As a result, when the normal AT state ends in a state where the value of the privilege point counter remains to some extent, the next normal AT state has a high degree of expectation of the extended suite. In this case, it is possible to increase the willingness of the player to continue the game.

  Note that the probability of holding winning in the holding lottery process may be changed according to the value of the privilege point counter. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the larger the value of the privilege point counter, the higher the probability of holding and winning.

<Other embodiments>
It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following different configurations may be individually applied to the configuration of the above embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  (1) In the privilege point lottery process (steps S2002 and S2502), when the privilege point is won, a value smaller than the privilege reference value is selected, but a value greater than the privilege reference value may be selected. It may be. In this case, at the timing when a value equal to or more than the privilege reference value is selected in the privilege point lottery process, the sub-MPU 82 can specify that the transition to the additional state is established or that the condition for transition to the additional state is satisfied. With the configuration in which the data is set, both the privilege points when the winning is performed in the privilege point lottery process and the privilege points when the winning is performed in the additional lottery process (step S2808) are added to the privilege point counter. In such a configuration, it is possible to accurately determine the condition for shifting to the additional state.

  (2) The sub-side RAM 84 is provided with a remaining set number counter in the normal AT state, and when the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference value, the value of the remaining set number counter is incremented by one. The configuration may be such that the privilege reference value is subtracted. In addition, in a case where an additional winning is achieved in the additional lottery process (step S2808), the additional set number of times added to the remaining set number counter is added without adding the privilege point to the privilege point counter. Is also good. In this case, the remaining MPU 82 can grasp the number of remaining sets separately from the privilege point. For example, when the light emission control of the privilege point notifying unit 67 is performed, the light emission of the stock notifying unit 68 is referred to by referring to the privilege point counter. When performing the control, it is possible to adopt a processing configuration in which the remaining set number counter is referred to.

  (3) The privilege reference numerical value is not limited to “7” and is arbitrary. However, in the privilege point lottery process (steps S2002 and S2502), the minimum value selected in the privilege point lottery process is such that if the event that wins the privilege point occurs a plurality of times, an event that exceeds the privilege reference numerical value occurs. It is preferable that the value be at least twice the value of the privilege point.

  (4) Instead of the configuration in which the privilege point lottery process (Step S2002, Step S2502) is executed when the player wins the privilege lottery opportunity, the privilege point lottery process is performed when the player wins the privilege lottery opportunity and a prize is generated. (Steps S2002 and S2502) may be executed. In this case, as a bonus lottery trigger, a role in which no prize is generated according to the operation order of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. May be included, or may not be included.

  (5) The privilege point counter may have a data capacity larger than 1 byte. Even in this case, in a configuration in which each counter is handled in byte units, the required storage capacity can be reduced by commonly using the privilege point counter. For example, when the privilege points and the remaining set number of the normal AT are managed by different counters, when the privilege point counter has a 2-byte configuration and the remaining set number counter has a 1-byte configuration, 3 bytes are required. However, it is possible to reduce by 1 byte by sharing the privilege point counter with a 2-byte configuration.

  (6) Instead of the configuration in which the privilege point lottery process (steps S2002 and S2502) is executed when the player wins the privilege lottery opportunity, the privilege point lottery process is executed when the player wins the privilege lottery opportunity. The bonus points corresponding to the winning lottery opportunity that has been won may be added to the bonus point counter without being executed. In this case, since the privilege point lottery process is not executed, the processing load is reduced, and the relationship between the privilege lottery trigger and the privilege point is clarified, and the degree of attention to the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game. Is enhanced.

  (7) If the player wins the privilege lottery opportunity, a lottery is performed to determine whether to add bonus points. If the lottery is won, the privilege point corresponding to the privilege lottery opportunity is the privilege point. It may be configured to add to the counter. In this case, the relationship between the privilege lottery trigger and the privilege points becomes clear, and the degree of attention to the result of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in each game is increased.

  (8) Instead of a configuration in which the value of the privilege point counter used in common is set separately for the privilege point notification unit 67 and the stock notification unit 68, the value of the privilege point counter is directly used by the predetermined notification unit. It may be configured to be notified. In this case, by enabling the player to recognize the privilege point corresponding to the occurrence of one of the remaining set times, the remaining set number can be recognized from the value of the privilege point counter, and the remaining set number can be recognized. It becomes possible to recognize privilege points necessary for the number of times to be newly added once.

  (9) In the case where the normal AT state is extended without going through the last chance state, even if the value of the privilege point counter is smaller than the privilege reference value, the configuration is such that the normal AT state of the extended holiday destination is surely taken over. Thus, a configuration may be adopted in which the takeover is performed when the takeover condition is satisfied. For example, when a succession is won in the succession lottery process executed at the time of the extended AT in the normal AT state, even if the value of the privilege point counter is smaller than the privilege reference value, the privilege may be inherited. Further, for example, when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or greater than the inheritance reference value, the configuration may be such that the value is inherited even if the value is less than the benefit reference value.

  (10) Even if the return to the normal AT state occurs in the last chance state, the privilege points smaller than the privilege reference value may be transferred to the normal AT state at the extended destination. In this case, it is possible to further increase the chance that the privilege points are equal to or larger than the privilege reference numerical value.

  (11) The configuration may be such that the value of the privilege point counter in the case where the normal AT state ends is always taken over to the normal AT state to which the shift has been made when the new transition condition is satisfied. In this case, it is possible to further increase the chance that the privilege points are equal to or larger than the privilege reference numerical value.

  (12) The AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) causes the AT to be out of the AT continuation, and the value of the privilege point counter becomes equal to or more than the privilege reference value during the period in which the defeat effect is being executed as a battle effect, so that the normal extended state villa. Occurs, or when a resurrection win occurs in the last chance state and a ream in the normal AT state occurs, the promotion lottery process at the time of resurrection is executed for the probability of becoming the AT continuous win in the AT continuous lottery process. When the promotion lottery process results in the promotion winning, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of the AT continuous winning increases. In this case, the probability of the promotion winning may be higher than the probability of the promotion winning in the promotion lottery process (step S2316) of the AT continuation probability that occurs when the AT continuation winning and the victory effect are executed. Good. Further, a configuration in which the resurrection winning in the last chance state is more likely to increase the probability of the AT continuous winning may be adopted. In these cases, when the extended AT condition in the normal AT state is satisfied under the condition set as the rear order, the extended AT in the normal AT state is more likely to occur. Can be maintained high until the end of the normal AT state.

  (13) The process of setting the AT continuation probability to the highest probability in relation to the victory counter (step S2308) and the AT continuation probability so that when the normal AT state is extended, the normal AT state is more easily extended. In addition to or instead of the configuration for executing the promotion lottery process (step S2316), a configuration in which privilege points are easily acquired, a configuration in which the value of acquired privilege points is increased, a configuration in which large privilege points are easily acquired, By adopting at least one of the configuration in which the probability that the number of sets is added is high and the configuration in which the number of remaining sets is easy to select is large, the normal AT state is extended in relation to the privilege point. It is good also as composition which becomes easy.

  (14) In the case where the AT has been discontinued in the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) but the normal AT state is extended, the probability of the AT continuation lottery process to be executed thereafter is low. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that can be lower or lower. In this case, it is possible to suppress the probability that the normal AT state will be extended while securing the opportunity of the ordinary AT state being extended.

  (15) The types of probabilities of the AT continuous winning in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) are not limited to six types and are arbitrary, and may be two types, three types, four types or five types. Well, seven or more types may be used. However, in order to generate an opportunity to be set to the highest probability regardless of the probability of the AT continuous winning, it is preferable that there are three or more types of the AT continuous winning probability.

  (16) When the number of executions of the victory effect reaches the predetermined number of executions, the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) is replaced with a configuration in which the probability of the AT continuous winning becomes the highest probability, and the AT continuous probability promotion lottery process is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of stages at which the probability increases is higher than in the case where the promotion is won in (Step S2316). For example, in the configuration in which the promotion winning in the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (step S2316) increases the probability of the AT continuation winning by one step, the number of executions of the victory effect becomes the predetermined number of executions , A configuration in which the probability of AT continuous winning is increased by two steps or more is considered.

  (17) The number of executions of the victory effect necessary for setting the probability of winning in the AT continuation victory is not limited to 12, but may be arbitrary, and may be one or two. Or three times, four times, or 13 or more times. However, in order to increase the degree of attention to the number of executions of the victory effect, the number is preferably two or more.

  (18) Instead of the configuration in which the number of executions of the victory effect is not taken over in the normal AT state that is transitioned when the next transition condition is satisfied, a configuration in which the victory effect is taken over reliably or a configuration that can be taken over may be used. As a configuration that can be taken over, a configuration in which a takeover lottery process in which a takeover is won with a predetermined probability may be executed, and a configuration in which the value of the privilege point counter is less than the privilege reference value but is greater than or equal to the takeover reference value is taken over It may be.

  (19) In order for the AT continuation probability promotion lottery process (Step S2316) to be executed, the AT continuation lottery process (Step S2309) results in AT continuation winning, and further, the battle lottery process (Step S2311) wins. It is necessary to select, but instead, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the promotion lottery process (step S2316) is executed reliably when the AT continuation winning is achieved. Regardless of the victory effect, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be executed without fail. In addition, when the normal AT state is extended, the promotion lottery process (step S2316) may be reliably executed.

  (20) The victory effect in the battle effect may be a victory that can be selected only when the value of the privilege point counter is equal to or more than the privilege reference value, and the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309) It is good also as a structure which can be selected only when it becomes. In this case, in order to set a high probability of AT continuous winning in relation to the number of executions of the victory effect, it is necessary to generate many target conditions among the above-described conditions, and the probability of AT continuous winning is required. Can be suppressed from being set higher.

  (21) The probability that the winning effect is selected in the battle lottery process (step S2303, step S2311, step S2605) may be changed. For example, the probability that the winning effect is selected may increase as the number of executions of the winning effect increases, or may decrease. In this case, depending on the number of executions of the victory effect, the victory effect may be easily selected or the victory effect may not be easily selected. Also, the configuration may be such that the larger the value of the privilege point counter is, the higher the probability of selecting the victory effect is, or the configuration may be lower. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the privilege point and the victory effect. Also, the configuration may be such that the probability that the winning effect is selected increases as the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state increases, or may decrease. In this case, it is possible to closely associate the number of remaining sets with the victory effect.

  (22) When the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state is one or more and the number of times that the normal AT state is extended to a predetermined number of times (for example, 20), the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the AT continuation becomes higher (for example, the highest probability). In this case, the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state and the probability of the AT continuation winning in the AT continuation lottery process are more closely related.

  (23) Probability of winning in the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) according to the number of times the victory effect has been executed or the number of times the normal AT state has been extended due to the remaining set number being 1 or more. May be gradually increased. For example, when the number of times becomes the first reference number (for example, three times), the probability of winning the AT continuation is increased by one step, and when the number of times becomes the second reference number (for example, five times), the AT continuation is performed. The configuration may be such that the probabilities set in relation to the reference number are different, such that the probability of winning is two levels higher.

  (24) The stock notification unit 68 is configured to perform the notification in accordance with the number range of the number of remaining sets in the normal AT state. Instead, the notification corresponding to the remaining number of sets in the normal AT state on a one-to-one basis. May be performed, or the remaining set number may be reported as it is.

  (25) Even if the number of remaining sets is 1 or more, or if the AT continuation lottery process results in AT continuation winning, once the execution of the normal AT state is completed, the non-AT state is temporarily set. After the transition, a new execution time of the normal AT state may be generated again.

  (26) The bonus points may not be referred to when the resurrection lottery process is executed in the last chance state. In this case, in the resurrection lottery process, a lottery according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game is performed. In this configuration, when a resurrection win is achieved in the last chance state, the configuration may be such that the privilege points are not transferred to the normal AT state of the extended holiday destination as in the above-described embodiment, or may be configured to be transferred.

  (27) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the bonus points smaller than the privilege reference value are referred to in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) of the last chance state, the AT continuous lottery process (step S2309) performs the process less than the privilege reference value. The privilege points may be referred to, and the larger the privilege points, the higher the probability of winning the AT continuation. In this case, if the AT continuation lottery process results in the AT continuation winning, the privilege point counter may be cleared to "0", and the "0" is cleared and the shift to the normal AT state of the extended holiday destination is performed. May be adopted.

  (28) In the last chance state, instead of the configuration in which the probability of the resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) varies according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) of the game, the resurrection winning according to the winning result May be changed. In this case, as a role of changing the probability of the resurrection winning, a winning is achieved in accordance with the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. May be included or a configuration that does not include a role that does not occur.

  (29) The last chance state is configured to continue over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the number of times a predetermined role such as the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role is won or the number of wins in the last chance state is determined. The probability of the resurrection winning in the resurrection lottery process (step S2907) may be changed accordingly. For example, when the predetermined combination is won once or twice, the first winning probability is set, and when the predetermined combination is won three to four times, the second winning probability is higher than the first winning probability. Can be considered. In this case, the player pays attention to the number of times a predetermined combination is won in the last chance state, and the interest of the game is improved.

  (30) The configuration is such that the last chance state continues over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and points are added according to the result of the lottery process (FIG. 12) or the winning result in the last chance state. Alternatively, the normal AT state may be continued according to the accumulated points. In this case, the bonus points may be added even in the last chance state, and the normal AT state may be continued when the bonus points become equal to or more than the bonus reference value in the last chance state.

  (31) The final chance state is configured to be continued over a plurality of games (for example, 10 games), and the normal AT state is consecutively extended according to the number of wins of a predetermined combination or the number of winnings of a predetermined combination in the final chance state. It is good also as a structure which performs. In this case, the probability that the normal AT state may be extended as the number of executions of the monitoring event out of the number of winnings of the predetermined combination and the number of winnings of the predetermined combination may be increased. A configuration may be adopted in which the normal AT state is extended in the case of the number of times or the maximum number. In order to enable the player to clearly recognize whether or not a monitoring event has occurred, the predetermined role is preferably a role in which a so-called missing does not occur, such as a normal replay role. .

  (32) In the transition chance state, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when the normal replay combination is won. However, the transition lottery process (step S1609) is executed when another combination is won. Alternatively, the configuration may be as follows. For example, the transfer lottery process (step S1609) may be executed when the first bell role or the second bell role, which is a winning combination that does not generate a prize depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, is executed. The shift lottery process is performed when the first watermelon role or the second watermelon role which does not generate a winning depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R (step S1609) ) May be executed. In addition, a transfer lottery process (step S1609) may be performed regardless of which combination is won. In this case, the transfer winning probability may be changed according to the winning combination. Good.

  (33) In the transfer chance state, the transfer lottery process (step S1609) is executed when a normal replay winning occurs, instead of the transfer lottery process (step S1609) executed when the normal replay combination is won. Alternatively, the configuration may be as follows.

  (34) In the transfer chance state, when the player wins the expectation improving combination, the transfer probability UP lottery process (step S1603) is executed, and the transfer probability UP is won, so that the transfer lottery process (step S1609) wins the transfer. Although the configuration is such that the probability is high, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the player wins the expectation improving role, the probability of the transfer winning is set higher in the transfer lottery process (step S1609). It is good also as a structure which generates reliably.

  (35) In the transition chance state, when the player is elected as the expectation enhancer, the number of continuous games in the transition chance state is surely extended. The configuration may be such that the number of continuous games is extended when a win is made in the executed lottery process. Further, a plurality of types of the number of continuous games may be set, and the number of continuous games to be extended may be selected from the plurality of types.

  (36) In a case where the player is elected as the expected degree improving combination in the transition chance state, the processing of adding the privilege point to the privilege point counter may be executed. In this case, the privilege point may be taken over to the normal AT state on condition that the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state, and the transition to the normal AT state occurs in the transition chance state. Regardless of whether or not it has been done, the privilege points may be taken over to the next normal AT state.

  (37) In the above embodiment, the bell prize occurs three times and the AT1 signal is turned on even though the penalty event has occurred and the state is not the non-AT state, and the AT1 signal is turned on. When the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped for the first time in the game that has won the special replay combination, the start wait time is set in the game. In this case, the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state in a penalty situation is satisfied instead of the configuration in which the image indicating that the bonus AT state is started in the start wait time is displayed on the image display device 66. An image may be displayed on the image display device 66 so that the player can recognize that the player is penalized and that no profit is given. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a warning image for a penalty operation is displayed.

  (38) In the bonus AT state, when the lottery process (FIG. 12) wins the first to third special replay combinations or results in the bonus AT state, the start wait time is not set. The start wait time may be set shorter than the case where the first to third special replay combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) or the case where the result is out in the lottery process (FIG. 12).

  (39) In the bonus AT state, when the first special replay combination is won in the lottery process (FIG. 12) or when the result is out, the start wait time is not set and the freeze time is not set. It may be. As a result, it is possible to increase the digestion speed of the game during the bonus AT state.

  (40) Instead of a configuration in which the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is added when the first to third special replays are won or a result of a loss in the bonus AT state, the bonus AT state is changed. The configuration may be such that the number of continuous games is extended.

  (41) The configuration in which the pressing order selected by the main-side MPU 72 is not notified at the time of normal replay winning in the additional state, but may be configured so that the pressing order can be notified even in the additional state. As a result, even when the state shifts to the additional state in the pre-branch AT state immediately after the normal AT state is extended, an opportunity to perform the OFF setting and the ON setting of the AT1 signal occurs.

  (42) When the normal AT state is extended, the role in which the pressing order is selected by the main MPU 72 to perform the OFF setting and the ON setting of the AT1 signal is not limited to the normal replay role, and is not limited to the normal replay role. It may be a role. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of combinations including a normal replay combination are targeted. However, it is necessary that the role to be selected in the push order is different from the role in which the stop order is notified in the normal AT state and the bonus AT state, thereby increasing the frequency of winning. In addition, it is preferable that the role to be selected in the pressing order selection is a role in which a winning is generated irrespective of the pressing order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R when the winning is achieved, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. It is preferable that the winning combination is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 in relation to the position.

  (43) In the push order lottery process (Step S405) when the normal replay combination is won, the first stopped reel and the second stopped reel among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are selected. However, only the first stopped reel may be selected. Even in this case, by setting the left reel 32L not to be selected as the first stop, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the correct answer in the pressing order is accidentally generated.

  (44) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the notification of the pressing order selected by the main MPU 72 when the normal replay combination is won is performed when the normal AT state is extended, the state is shifted to the normal AT state. It is good also as a structure performed when it does. In this case, the main MPU 72 sets the AT1 signal to the ON state when the push order is correct at the time of the normal replay winning while the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, thereby setting the AT1 signal according to the occurrence of the bell prize. There is no need to set the signal to the ON state. In addition, in the situation where the AT1 signal is in the OFF state, the total number of times when the push order is correct at the time of the normal replay winning and the number of times the bell prize is generated is the reference number for the ON state setting. In such a case, the AT1 signal may be set to the ON state. In this case, when the normal AT state is entered, the timing for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state can be advanced.

  (45) Even if it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal, the main MPU 72 selects the push order correct answer counter provided in the sub RAM 84 until the value becomes 1 or more. Instead of the configuration in which the notification of the pressing order different from the pressing order is not executed, the configuration in which the notification of the different pressing order is always performed in a situation where it is not necessary to set the OFF / ON state of the AT1 signal may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting of the OFF / ON state occurs by accident.

  (46) Although the output state of the AT1 signal is changed from the ON state to the OFF state when shifting to the bonus AT state in the normal AT state, the output state of the AT1 signal is changed to the ON state instead. May be maintained. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC of the game hall to recognize the number of times of setting in the normal AT state.

  (47) Even when the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is one or more as in the above embodiment, the AT2 signal is temporarily set to the OFF state when one execution of the bonus AT state is completed. In the above, there is a setting difference between the number of remaining sets selected when the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state is satisfied and the number of remaining sets selected when the additional condition for the number of remaining sets is satisfied during the bonus AT state. Configuration. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC.

  (48) When the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state or the condition for adding the number of remaining sets in the bonus AT state is satisfied, one execution of the bonus AT state ends within the range of the number of remaining sets selected at one time ( Even if 30 games are completed), the AT2 signal may not be set to the OFF state. In this case, on the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC, the total number of times that the condition for shifting to the bonus AT state and the number of times that the condition for adding the remaining set times of the bonus AT state are satisfied is displayed. In this configuration, a configuration in which there is a setting difference between the transition condition and the additional condition may be employed. In this case, the player can predict the set value of the slot machine 10 by checking the third display portion DC3 of the data counter DC.

  (49) The configuration may be such that the AT1 signal is set to the OFF state when an event in which a bell prize does not occur occurs for a predetermined number of times on the OFF side when the first bell role or the second bell role is won. . In this case, the number of occurrences of the bell prize (the number of times on the ON side) necessary for setting the AT1 signal to the ON state may be greater than the number of times on the OFF side. May be the same as the number of times, and the number of times on the OFF side may be larger than the number of times on the ON side.

  (50) By making the internal state notification unit 63 capable of displaying a plurality of types of emission colors, the internal state notification unit 63 may be used to notify various internal states. For example, a bonus AT state generated under a penalty situation may be notified separately from the inside state of the CB. Further, when a winning state is achieved, the winning state is maintained until a prize is generated. If there is a BB (Big Bonus) role and an RB (Regular Bonus) role in addition to the CB role, Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which each of the CB internal post-state, the BB internal post-state, and the RB internal post-state is notified by the emission color in the internal state notifying unit 63.

  (51) Instead of the configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is provided so as to be integrated with the acquired number display unit 62, a configuration in which the internal state notification unit 63 is provided so as to be integrated with the credit display unit 61 may be adopted. Further, the internal state notification unit 63 may be provided separately from the acquired number display unit 62.

  (52) The timing at which the internal state notification unit 63 starts lighting when the CB internal rear state is set is not limited to before the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. The lighting may be started after the rotation of the 32L, 32M, 32R is started and before the stop operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled, and the reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be stopped last. The lighting may be started before the stopped reel operation can be performed.

  (53) When shifting to the bonus AT state, a transition to the bonus AT state may be invalidated when a CB winning occurs.

  (54) When shifting to the bonus AT state, or when a CB prize is generated while the bonus AT state is being executed, the number of games consumed in the CB state is reduced from the number of continued games in the bonus AT state. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games consumed after the end of the CB in-progress state but before the CB in-CB state is reached is not subtracted from the continuous game number.

  (55) When the wait time is set by winning the first to third special replay combinations, the wait time is set at the start of the next game after the winning game. It may be configured to be set at the end of the winning game.

  (56) In any case, the setting of the AT1 signal to the ON state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the ON state may be performed at the start of the next game after the game in which the ON condition is satisfied. . Further, in any case, the setting of the AT1 signal to the OFF state and the setting of the AT2 signal to the OFF state may be performed at the end of the game in which the condition for setting the OFF state is satisfied.

  (57) In the AT continuation lottery process (step S2309), the configuration may be such that the probability of the AT continuation winning is reported, or an effect that allows the probability to be predicted may be executed.

  (58) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that a medal is paid out when a small role prize is established. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which some kind of privilege is provided to the player is provided. I just need. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a prize other than a medal is paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine which does not have a real medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the grant of a privilege.

  (59) The present invention may be applied to a so-called A-type slot machine, and may be a B-type, a C-type, a composite type of an A-type and a C-type, a composite type of a B-type and a C-type, and furthermore, an RT game or a CT. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a game.

  (60) The design of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character or the like, but may be a geometric line or figure. Further, it is possible to compose a symbol by light, color, or the like, or to compose a symbol by a three-dimensional shape or the like, or to compose a symbol by combining them. That is, the symbol may be any as long as it has a function as information having distinctiveness.

  (61) In each of the above embodiments, an example has been described in which the slot machine 10 is embodied. However, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine, or may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. Is also good.

<About the invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Characteristic A group>
Feature A1. When the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied (prize point winning in the privilege point lottery process), privilege numerical information (privilege points) corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value is stored in the privilege storage means (the sub RAM 84). A first storage execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005, S2007, S2011, and S2504 in the sub-MPU 82) to be stored in the privilege point counter);
When the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numeric value, a predetermined benefit providing means (in the sub-MPU 82) for providing a predetermined benefit advantageous to the player. A function of making an affirmative determination in step S2301 and performing the subsequent processing and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2609 in the sub-MPU 82 and performing the subsequent processing);
When the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied (starting of the bonus AT state and winning in the additional lottery process), information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more) is provided. A second storage execution unit (function for executing the processing of steps S1904, S2405, S2804, S2810, and S2904 in the sub-MPU 82) to be stored in the privilege storage unit;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A1, regarding the grant of the predetermined privilege, the predetermined privilege is granted based on the fact that the privilege numerical information stored with the establishment of the first privilege numerical condition is accumulated and becomes information equal to or more than the privilege reference value. There are cases where the predetermined privilege is given based on the satisfaction of the second privilege numerical condition. As a result, the mode of giving the predetermined privilege is diversified, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In this case, when the second privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, the number of grants of the predetermined privilege is not stored, but information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value × n is stored in the privilege storage means. Thus, the privilege storage means can be commonly used in the configuration in which the mode of providing the predetermined privilege is diversified as described above. Therefore, the storage means to be referred to when determining whether or not the predetermined privilege should be granted can be consolidated, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced. Further, the required storage capacity can be reduced. As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A2. There is provided a bonus numerical value lottery means (a function of executing the processing of step S2002 in the sub-MPU 82) for determining the numerical value information of privilege to be stored by the first storage executing means by the numerical value lottery processing. The gaming machine according to Feature A1.

  According to the feature A2, when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means can be diversified, and the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and the privilege numerical information is accumulated. Diversification when the predetermined privilege is granted.

  In addition, as a more specific configuration of the feature A2, there are a plurality of types of privilege numerical information selected in the privilege numerical lottery process, and the privilege numerical information is information having a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value. Is ".

  Feature A3. When the predetermined privilege is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means, the grant updating means (steps S2302 and S2604 in the sub-MPU 82) updates the privilege storage means so that the privilege reference value is subtracted. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, comprising:

  According to the feature A3, in a configuration in which the privilege storage means is used in common when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege when the predetermined privilege is granted is provided. It is possible to standardize the handling of numerical information. Thereby, the processing load is reduced.

  Feature A4. A numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storing means is a numerical value larger than the privilege standard numerical value × (n−1) and smaller than the privilege standard numerical value × n (n is an integer of 1 or more). In this situation, the bonus numerical value notifying unit that notifies information corresponding to the numerical value exceeding the privilege reference numerical value × (n−1) (the function of executing the process of step S2204 in the privilege point notifying unit 67 and the sub MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, comprising:

  According to the feature A4, it is possible for the player to recognize less than the award of the predetermined award as the award numerical information, and the amount of the award numerical information is necessary in a situation where the first award numerical condition can be satisfied. It is possible to play a game while clearly recognizing whether or not the game is being played. As a result, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation.

Feature A5. A division execution unit (a function of executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-MPU 82) for dividing a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value;
The gaming machine according to Feature A4, wherein the privilege numerical value notifying unit notifies information corresponding to a remaining numerical value of the division result by the division executing unit.

  According to the feature A5, in a configuration in which the privilege storage means is used in common when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the predetermined privilege is given as the privilege numerical information. Can be derived by a simple processing configuration.

  Feature A6. A situation in which the numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storing means is the privilege reference numerical value × n or more and smaller than the privilege reference numerical value × (n + 1) (n is an integer of 1 or more). Any of the features A1 to A5, including a privilege number notification unit (a function of executing the processing of step S2203 in the sub-MPU 82) for notifying the information corresponding to the n. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A6, it is possible for the player to recognize the number of times the predetermined privilege has been given, and it is possible to appropriately enhance the superiority of the player.

Feature A7. A division execution unit (a function of executing the process of step S2201 in the sub-MPU 82) for dividing a numerical value corresponding to the privilege numerical value information stored in the privilege storage unit by the privilege reference numerical value;
The gaming machine according to Feature A6, wherein the privilege number notifying unit notifies information corresponding to a numerical value of a quotient of a result of division by the division executing unit.

  According to the feature A7, in the configuration in which the privilege storage means is used in common both when the first privilege numerical condition is satisfied and when the second privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the number of times of giving the predetermined privilege is simplified. It can be derived by the processing configuration.

Feature A8. The first privilege numerical condition is satisfied in a gaming state (normal AT state) corresponding to the first privilege.
In the gaming state corresponding to the first privilege, as a result of executing the storing process of the privilege numerical information in the privilege storing means by the first storage executing means, the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storing means becomes the privilege. When the information becomes equal to or more than the reference numerical value, means for shifting to a gaming state (additional state) corresponding to the second privilege in which the second privilege numerical value condition can be satisfied (the processing of steps S2104 to S2107 in the sub-MPU 82 is executed). The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, having a function and a function of executing the processing of steps S2611 to S2614 in the sub-MPU 82).

  According to the feature A8, there are a gaming state in which the first privilege numerical condition can be satisfied and a gaming state in which the second privilege numerical condition can be satisfied, and diversification of the gaming state can be achieved. In addition, in the gaming state corresponding to the first privilege, the bonus numerical value information becomes the information equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value, so that the game state shifts to the gaming state corresponding to the second privilege, so that both gaming states can be closely related.

Feature A9. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
The pattern display means is configured to start the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and to stop the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72);
With
At least one of the first privilege numerical condition and the second privilege numerical condition is a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated, or a winning after the variable display of the picture is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, which is established according to a result.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature A9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature A10. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The feature A9 according to the feature A9, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a game state (normal AT state) in which the predetermined order is notified when the role becomes the order corresponding combination. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature A10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A storage execution unit (sub) that stores the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the privilege storage unit (the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process). Function of executing the processing of steps S2005, S2007, S2011 and S2504 in the side MPU 82);
In the event that the determination is triggered, the privilege criterion determining means (step S2301 in the sub-MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storing means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. And a function of executing the process of step S2609);
When the privilege criterion determining means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or more than the privilege criterion numerical value, a predetermined privilege providing means (step in the sub-MPU 82) for providing a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player. A function of making an affirmative determination in S2301 and executing the subsequent processing and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2609 in the sub-MPU 82 and executing the subsequent processing);
With
A gaming machine, wherein the privilege numerical information of the privilege storage means corresponding to a value less than the privilege reference numerical value can be inherited even after the determination trigger.

  According to the feature B1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege numerical information stored when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, and becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value. The game is played while expecting the establishment of the bonus, and the game is played while expecting that the privilege numerical information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  In this case, the benefit numerical information corresponding to a value less than the benefit reference numeric value may be taken over even after the determination trigger. As a result, the opportunity for the privilege numerical information to be information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference value increases, and the opportunity to have an expectation that the privilege numeric information can be information corresponding to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference value is increased. Many can be generated. As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as the privilege numerical condition, in the configuration provided with the privilege numerical lottery means for executing the privilege numerical lottery process (the function of executing the privilege point lottery process in the sub-side RAM 84), the winning is performed in the privilege numerical lottery process. "Condition". Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the privilege numerical information determined by the privilege numerical lottery process is stored in the privilege storage means.

  Feature B2. The feature B1 according to the feature B1, wherein when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied, the storage executing unit stores privilege numerical value information corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference numerical value in the privilege storing unit. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B2, by accumulating the privilege numerical information acquired when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, the privilege numerical information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more can be obtained. Thereby, it is necessary to satisfy the privilege numerical condition a plurality of times in order to obtain the privilege numerical information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more, and it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation.

Feature B3. The privilege numerical condition is configured to be satisfied in a gaming state (normal AT state) corresponding to the privilege,
It is a configuration in which one execution of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is ended after the determination is triggered,
The feature B1 or B2, wherein the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means in the bonus-enabled gaming state in a predetermined execution time can be carried over to the bonus-enabled gaming state in the next execution time. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature B3, the benefit numerical information acquired in one execution of the privilege-supporting game state can be carried over to the privilege-supporting game state in the next execution time, and thus is obtained just before the end of the privilege-supporting gaming state. Even if the privilege numerical information is obtained, it is possible to enjoy the benefit from it. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect the fulfillment of the privilege numerical condition at any timing of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege.

Feature B4. In the case where the continuation condition is satisfied, a new execution of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is started after one execution of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege ends, and
When the continuation condition is satisfied and the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is continued, the numerical value information of the privilege stored in the privilege storage means is transferred to the gaming state corresponding to the privilege after continuation. The gaming machine according to B3.

  According to the feature B4, when the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is extended, the bonus numerical information is carried over to the gaming state corresponding to the bonus after the continuation, so that the profit when the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is extended is increased. This makes it possible to increase the sense of expectation that the game state corresponding to the privilege will be extended to the extended run.

Feature B5. The gaming state corresponding to the privilege is a gaming state in which the expected degree of application of the gaming medium is higher than a predetermined gaming state,
The predetermined privilege providing means determines that the continuation condition is satisfied when the privilege criterion determining means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion value. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein a new execution time of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is started after the end of the game.

  According to the feature B5, the bonus numerical value information becomes information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more, so that the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is extended, and the game is performed while expecting that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied. It will be.

  Feature B6. The feature B5 according to Feature B5, wherein the continuation condition includes a condition different from a condition that the privilege criterion determining unit determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion value. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B6, even if the privilege numerical value information does not become information corresponding to the privilege reference numerical value or more, if another continuation condition is satisfied, the gaming state corresponding to the privilege can be extended, so that the gaming state corresponding to the privilege. Can be given many opportunities to stay in a row. In addition, even if the other continuation condition is satisfied and the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is extended, the bonus numerical value information is carried over to the gaming state corresponding to the bonus after the continuation. It is possible to provide many opportunities to stay in a row.

  Feature B7. Even when the continuation condition is not satisfied, the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage means can be carried over to the gaming state corresponding to the benefit generated by a new start trigger. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, it is possible to give many opportunities to inherit the privilege numerical information.

  Feature B8. When the continuation condition is not satisfied, a handover lottery unit that determines whether or not to store and retain the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage unit by a handover lottery process (the process of step S4001 in the sub-MPU 82 is performed). The gaming machine according to feature B7, comprising:

  According to the feature B8, it is possible to diversify the mode when the privilege numerical information is taken over.

  Feature B9. When the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storage means is information corresponding to a large value, the probability of being inherited after the determination trigger is higher than when the privilege numerical information is information corresponding to a small value. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8.

  According to the feature B9, even in the case where the award of the privilege numerical information corresponding to less than the privilege reference numerical value is used as a trigger, the probability that the numerical value of the privilege numerical information at that time is large is greater than the probability that the privilege numerical information is small. Therefore, it is advantageous to set the numerical value of the privilege numerical information as large as possible. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the privilege numerical condition is satisfied.

Feature B10. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
The pattern display means is configured to start the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and to stop the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72);
With
The feature B1 is characterized in that the privilege numerical condition is established according to a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or a winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. A gaming machine according to any one of B9 to B9.

  In the gaming machine having the feature B10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature B11. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is obtained.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature B11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B11, the features A1 to A10, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 in the sub-MPU 82 and steps S1706 to S1 in the sub-MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function for executing the processing of S1709);
In the case of a continuous lottery trigger, a continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process as to whether or not to start a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state after one execution round of the advantageous gaming state ends Means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-MPU 82);
A predetermined transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S2913 in the sub-MPU 82) for transitioning to the predetermined game state after a lapse of the post-continuation period when the continuous lottery process results in a disconnection;
Advantageous continuation means for starting a new execution of the advantageous gaming state when the continuation condition is satisfied in the post-continuation period (a function of executing a setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-MPU 82);
With
The continuous lottery executing means, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle of the post-continuation disengagement period and a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started, thereafter executes the continuous lottery process again. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the feature C1, the advantageous gaming state is not only extended when the continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, but is also advantageous when the continuation condition is satisfied in the post-continuous period in the case where the continuous lot is lost. The game state is extended. This makes it possible to diversify the modes in which the advantageous game state is extended, and it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of expectation of the player expecting that the advantageous game state is extended.

  Also, even if the continuous lottery process is once discontinued, if the continuation condition is satisfied in the subsequent non-continuous period and the advantageous game state is extended, the opportunity for the continuous lottery process to be executed again Granted. Thereby, it becomes possible to make it difficult to predict the timing when the extended game in the advantageous game state ends, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the player's expectation in the advantageous game state. As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that one execution of the advantageous game state may be ended when an end condition is satisfied, and the end condition is defined as one game in which the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means is started and ended. In this case, the predetermined number of games may be consumed, or the end lottery process may be completed.

  In addition, the post-discontinuation period may be a period in which a plurality of predetermined games are executed in a case where the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means is started and ended as one game, and in this period, the post-continuation departure is performed. An effect indicating a period may be executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C2. Probability improving means (a function of executing the processing of Steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-MPU 82) for making the probability of a continuous winning in the continuous lottery processing higher than before;
In the case where the continuation condition is satisfied in the middle of the post-continuation disengagement period and a new execution of the advantageous gaming state is started, the probability improving means is thereafter used until the continuation lottery process is executed again. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the probability of the continuous winning can be increased.

  According to the feature C2, when the continuation condition is satisfied in the non-continuation period and the advantageous gaming state is extended, not only is the opportunity to execute the continuous lottery process again given, but also the continuous lottery executed again. The probability of winning continuously in the process can be high. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of the player when the continuation condition is satisfied in the continuation out period.

  Feature C3. The feature improvement means according to the feature C2, wherein, when the number of executions of the advantageous game state is repeated and a maximum probability setting condition is satisfied, the probability of the continuous winning is set to a maximum probability. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C3, since the advantageous game state is extended, the state becomes more advantageous for the player. As a result, the benefit of giving the opportunity to execute the continuous lottery process again is increased, and the player's expectation can be maintained even during the non-continuation period.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which has three or more types of probabilities of winning continuously.

Feature C4. The probability improving means includes:
First probability improving means (a function of executing the processing of step S2316 in the sub-MPU 82) which can increase the probability of the continuous winning when the continuous winning is made in the continuous lottery process;
Second probability improving means for increasing the probability of the continuous winning on at least one condition that continuation of a new execution number of the advantageous game state occurs even if the continuous lottery processing results in a loss of continuation. (The function of executing the processing of step S2308 in the sub-MPU 82);
A gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, comprising:

  According to the feature C4, in both the case where a continuous winning is performed in the continuous lottery process and the advantageous game state is extended, and the case where the continuation is lost but the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state is extended, is performed. In the continuous lottery process, the probability of winning continuously can be increased. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the advantageous game state is extended.

  Feature C5. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the second probability improving means has a larger increase in the probability of the continuous winning than the first probability improving means.

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to increase the profit in the case where the continuation condition is satisfied and the advantageous gaming state is continued even though the continuation off period has come.

Feature C6. Specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the number of remaining executions of the advantageous game state;
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein

  According to the feature C6, when the remaining number of executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process in the extended game in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from being extended unnecessarily, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuous lottery process results in a disconnection.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the continuation condition is that information stored in the specific storage unit is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times.

  According to the feature C7, it is possible to generate an event of an extended game in the advantageous game state after the start of the post-continuation period, using the information indicating the number of remaining executions.

Feature C8. A storage executing unit (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-MPU 82) for storing bonus numerical information (privilege points) in the specific storage unit when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (prize point winning in the privilege point lottery process). , The function of executing the processing of steps S2011 and S2504),
In the event that the determination is triggered, the privilege reference determining means (step S2301 in the sub-MPU 82) determines whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numeric value. And a function of executing the process of step S2609);
With
A configuration in which a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process when the privilege criterion determining unit determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. And
The gaming machine according to Feature C7, wherein the continuation condition is that the benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numeric value.

  According to the feature C8, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value by the time of the determination trigger, the privilege numerical information becomes the value equal to or more than the privilege standard numerical value in the period after the continuation. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is extended. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the timing of the determination, so that the bonus numerical information has a larger value until the timing of the determination. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature C9. In a case where a continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process, a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started after a lapse of a post-period of continuation, in any one of the features C1 to C8. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature C9, it is possible to teach the player that the continuous winning has been achieved.

  Note that the post-continuation winning period may be a period in which a plurality of predetermined games are executed when the variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means is started and ended as one game. An effect indicating a period may be executed by the effect executing means.

Feature C10. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
The pattern display means is configured to start the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and to stop the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72);
With
The feature is characterized in that the continuation condition is satisfied according to a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or a winning result after the variable display of the picture is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of C9.

  In the gaming machine having the feature C10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

Feature C11. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to Feature C10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is attained.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature C11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 in the sub-MPU 82 and steps S1706 to S1 in the sub-MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function for executing the processing of S1709);
In the case of a continuous lottery trigger, a continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process as to whether or not to start a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state after one execution round of the advantageous gaming state ends Means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-MPU 82);
Probability improving means for increasing the probability of the continuous winning (the function of executing the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-MPU 82), with at least one condition that the continuation of the new execution times of the advantageous gaming state occurs. )When,
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when the continuous lottery process results in the continuous winning, the advantageous game state is extended, so that the player plays the game while expecting the continuous lottery process to be the continuous winning, Amusement of the game is improved.

  In this case, when the advantageous game state is extended, the probability of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process can be improved. Thereby, when the advantageous game state is extended, the extended arrangement is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the extended gaming state being extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the elation of the player when the advantageous game state is extended. As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the probability improving unit increases a probability of the continuous winning, with at least one condition that the continuous winning is performed in the continuous lottery process.

  According to the feature D2, the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process increases the probability of the continuous winning. As a result, the player's attention to whether or not a continuous winning is made in the continuous lottery process is increased.

Feature D3. The probability improving means includes:
Probability lottery executing means for executing a continuation probability lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-MPU 82), with at least one condition that the continuous lottery has been achieved in the continuous lottery process;
A probability setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-MPU 82) for increasing the probability of the continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine according to Feature D2, comprising:

  According to the feature D3, in order to set a high probability of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, the probability of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is set, and further, the probability of the continuous winning in the continuous probability lottery process is set high. Must be the result for As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the probability that the continuous winning is set high is increased.

Feature D4. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (AT state before branching) and a subsequent second advantageous period (AT state after branching),
The continuous lottery execution means executes the continuous lottery process when the first advantageous period ends.
In the gaming machine, an effect period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution of the advantageous game state is continuously executed in the second advantageous period is effected by the effect execution means (image display device 66). Effect control means (a function of executing the process of step S1109 in the sub-MPU 82) to be executed,
When a specific effect (victory effect) is executed as the advantageous period effect, there is a possibility that the probability of the continuous winning is increased or the probability of the continuous winning is increased by the probability improving means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the gaming machine is higher than in a case where an effect is executed.

  According to the feature D4, in the second advantageous period of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not the new execution of the advantageous gaming state is continuously executed is executed, and the advantageous gaming state is extended. It is possible to provide a notification as to whether or not the game is an effect to the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the specific effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the probability of the continuous winning is high or the possibility is high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the specific effect to occur, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D5. The effect control means,
An effect lottery executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-MPU 82) for executing an effect content lottery process when a continuous winning is obtained in the continuous lottery process;
A specific effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-MPU 82) for setting the specific effect as an effect performed in the second advantageous period in accordance with a result of the effect content lottery process;
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect performed in the second advantageous period in accordance with the result of the effect content lottery process;
With
The probability improving means includes:
A probability lottery executing means (a function of executing the process of step S2316 in the sub-MPU 82) for executing a continuation probability lottery process when the specific effect is set as the effect performed in the second advantageous period;
A probability setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2318 in the sub-MPU 82) for improving the probability of the continuous winning according to the result of the probability lottery process;
The gaming machine according to feature D4, comprising:

  According to the feature D5, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the extended play in the advantageous game state is determined. Therefore, the player expects the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. A game will be played. In addition, when the specific effect is executed among the specific effect and the predetermined effect, there is a possibility that the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process is high, so the player further executes the specific effect. You will play while expecting that. As a result, it is possible to make the player's sense of expectation multi-stage, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature D6. The feature improvement means according to the feature D4 or D5, wherein, when the number of times the specific effect is executed reaches a predetermined number of executions, the probability of the continuous winning is set to the highest probability. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D6, since the number of executions of the specific effect becomes the predetermined number of executions, the probability of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process becomes the highest probability, and thus the player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed. Can be increased.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which has three or more types of probabilities of winning continuously.

Feature D7. Specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the number of remaining executions of the advantageous game state;
When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

  According to the feature D7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process in the extended game in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from being extended unnecessarily, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuous lottery process results in a disconnection.

  Feature D8. The probability improving means may be configured such that when the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state is started, The gaming machine according to the feature D7, wherein the setting for increasing the probability is not performed.

  According to the feature D8, it is possible to prevent the probability that a continuous winning is made in the continuous lottery process from being increased more than necessary.

Feature D9. A storage executing unit (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-MPU 82) for storing bonus numerical information (privilege points) in the specific storage unit when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (prize point winning in the privilege point lottery process). , The function of executing the processing of steps S2011 and S2504),
In the event that the determination is triggered, the privilege reference determining means (step S2301 in the sub-MPU 82) determines whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numeric value. And a function of executing the process of step S2609);
With
A configuration in which a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process when the privilege criterion determining unit determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. And
Even when the continuous lottery process has become out of continuation, the bonus numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent post-continuation losing period is information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value. The feature D7 or D8 is further provided with advantageous continuation means (a function of executing a setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-MPU 82) for starting a new execution of the advantageous gaming state when the situation becomes no longer. The described gaming machine.

  According to the feature D9, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference value by the time the judgment is triggered, the privilege value information is changed to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference value in the period after the continuation. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is extended. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the timing of the determination, so that the bonus numerical information has a larger value until the timing of the determination. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature D10. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
The pattern display means is configured to start the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and to stop the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72);
With
The game according to any one of features D1 to D9, wherein in the advantageous gaming state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is performed a plurality of times. Machine.

  In the gaming machine having the feature D10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature D11. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to Feature D10, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is achieved.

  In the gaming machine having the feature D11, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Advantageous transition means (steps S1614 to S1617 in the sub-MPU 82 and steps S1706 to S1 in the sub-MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function for executing the processing of S1709);
In the case of a continuous lottery trigger, a continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process as to whether or not to start a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state after one execution round of the advantageous gaming state ends Means (a function of executing the process of step S2309 in the sub-MPU 82);
Specific storage means (privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) for storing information capable of specifying the number of remaining executions of the advantageous gaming state;
If the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, or if the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, a new execution time of the advantageous gaming state starts. Continuation means (the function of executing the setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-MPU 82),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when the continuous lottery process results in continuous winning, not only the advantageous game state is extended, but also the information stored in the specific storage means that the remaining number of executions is one or more. Even if the information is information, the advantageous game state is extended. This makes it possible to diversify the modes in which the advantageous game state is extended, and it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of expectation of the player expecting that the advantageous game state is extended. As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E2. Probability improving means for increasing the probability of winning continuously in the continuous lottery process when the execution times of the advantageous game state are repeated and the probability improvement condition is satisfied (the processing of steps S2308 and S2316 in the sub-MPU 82 is executed). The gaming machine according to feature E1, further comprising:

  According to the feature E2, the probability of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process due to the extended gaming state being extended can be improved. In other words, as the number of remaining executions is set to be larger and the advantageous game state is extended, the probability of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process increases. Thereby, when the advantageous game state is extended, the extended arrangement is more likely to occur, and the advantage of the extended gaming state being extended is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the elation of the player when the advantageous game state is extended. Further, it is possible to closely relate the consecutive play in the advantageous game state related to the remaining number of executions and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting the double play mode is synergistic. It is possible to do.

Feature E3. The advantageous gaming state includes a first advantageous period (AT state before branching) and a subsequent second advantageous period (AT state after branching),
The advantageous continuation means determines whether or not the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times when the first advantageous period ends, or To determine whether or not the game has been won continuously.
In the gaming machine, an effect period effect (battle effect) corresponding to whether or not a new execution of the advantageous game state is continuously executed in the second advantageous period is effected by the effect execution means (image display device 66). Effect control means (a function of executing the process of step S1109 in the sub-MPU 82) to be executed,
The effect control means,
Effect lottery executing means (function for executing the process of step S2311 in the sub-MPU 82) for executing effect content lottery processing when the new execution time of the advantageous game state is continuously executed;
Specific effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-MPU 82) for setting a specific effect (winning effect) as an effect to be executed in the second advantageous period in accordance with the result of the effect content lottery process;
Predetermined effect setting means (a function of executing the process of step S2312 in the sub-MPU 82) for setting a predetermined effect (drawing effect) as an effect performed in the second advantageous period in accordance with the result of the effect content lottery process;
With
When the number of times the specific effect has been executed has reached the predetermined number of times, the gaming machine increases the probability of a continuous winning in the continuous lottery process (the process of step S2308 in the sub-MPU 82 is performed). The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, comprising:

  According to the feature E3, in the second advantageous period of the advantageous gaming state, an advantageous period effect corresponding to whether or not a new execution of the advantageous gaming state is continuously executed is executed, so that the advantageous gaming state is extended. It is possible to provide a notification as to whether or not the game is an effect to the player, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when the specific effect or the predetermined effect is executed as the advantageous period effect, the extended play in the advantageous game state is determined. Therefore, the player performs the game while expecting the specific effect or the predetermined effect to be executed. Becomes In addition, since the number of executions of the specific effect is the predetermined number of executions, the probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process increases, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed Become.

  In addition, since the specific effect is executed even when the advantageous game state is continued because the number of remaining executions is one or more, the number of executions of the specific effect increases as the number of remaining executions increases. The expectation of the number of times is increased. Therefore, when a large number is set as the number of remaining executions, not only the advantage that the number of consecutive games in the advantageous game state increases, but also the advantage that the possibility of the continuous winning probability to be improved increases is provided, The advantage of setting a large number of remaining executions is increased.

  Feature E4. The game according to Feature E3, further comprising: a number-of-executions notifying unit (a function of executing the process of Step S2205 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying the number of times the specific effect has been executed. Machine.

  According to the feature E4, it is possible to appropriately increase the sense of expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will be the predetermined number of executions.

  Feature E5. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4, wherein said probability improving means sets the probability of the continuous winning to the highest probability.

  According to the feature E5, the advantage that the advantageous game state is extended in a row is increased.

  Feature E6. Any of features E1 to E5, including a remaining number corresponding notification unit (a function of executing the process of step S2203 in the sub-side MPU 82) for notifying information corresponding to the remaining number of executions. 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to recognize at least how long the advantageous game state is extended through the remaining number corresponding notification means, and it is possible to enhance the superiority of the player.

  In particular, when the configuration of the above-described feature E3 is provided, the player himself / herself determines the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the specific effect will be the predetermined number of executions in relation to the remaining number of executions obtained by the remaining number corresponding notification unit. It becomes possible to recognize. As a result, it is possible to closely relate the consecutive play in the advantageous game state related to the remaining number of executions and the continuous winning probability of the continuous lottery process, and the effect of setting the double play mode is synergistic. It becomes possible.

  Feature E7. When the information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to one or more remaining execution times, the advantageous continuation means may execute a new execution time of the advantageous game state without executing the continuous lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the game is started.

  According to the feature E7, when the number of remaining executions is 1 or more, the digestion is prioritized over the continuous lottery process in the extended game in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous game state from being extended unnecessarily, as compared with the configuration in which the remaining number of executions is exhausted when the continuous lottery process results in a disconnection.

Feature E8. A storage executing unit (steps S2005 and S2007 in the sub-MPU 82) for storing bonus numerical information (privilege points) in the specific storage unit when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (prize point winning in the privilege point lottery process). , The function of executing the processing of steps S2011 and S2504),
In the event that the determination is triggered, the privilege reference determining means (step S2301 in the sub-MPU 82) determines whether or not the benefit numerical information stored in the specific storage means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the benefit reference numeric value. And a function of executing the process of step S2609);
With
The advantage continuation means, when the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion value, newly executes the advantageous game state without executing the continuation lottery process. The bonus numerical information stored in the specific storage means in a subsequent post-continuation loss period even if the continuous lottery process results in a loss of continuation. The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E7, wherein when the information corresponding to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value is obtained, a new execution of the advantageous gaming state is started. .

  According to the feature E8, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value by the time of the determination, the privilege numerical information becomes the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value in the period after the continuation. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is extended. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the timing of the determination, so that the bonus numerical information has a larger value until the timing of the determination. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature E9. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
The pattern display means is configured to start the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and to stop the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72);
With
The game according to any one of features E1 to E8, wherein in the advantageous gaming state, a game in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped after the variable display of the pattern is started is performed a plurality of times. Machine.

  In the gaming machine having the feature E9, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

Feature E10. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to Feature E9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is attained.

  In the gaming machine having the feature E10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features E1 to E10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. A storage execution unit (sub) that stores the privilege numerical information (privilege point) in the privilege storage unit (the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84) when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process). Function of executing the processing of steps S2005, S2007, S2011 and S2504 in the side MPU 82);
In the event that the determination is triggered, the privilege criterion determining means (step S2301 in the sub-MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storing means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. And a function of executing the process of step S2609);
When the privilege criterion determining means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or more than the privilege criterion numerical value, a predetermined privilege providing means (step in the sub-MPU 82) for providing a predetermined privilege advantageous to the player. A function of making an affirmative determination in S2301 and executing the subsequent processing and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2609 in the sub-MPU 82 and executing the subsequent processing);
When the privilege criterion determining unit does not determine that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value, an additional lottery executing unit (sub-side) that executes an additional lottery process to determine whether to give the predetermined privilege. A function of executing the process of step S2907 in the MPU 82);
With
The game wherein the giving lottery executing means executes the giving lottery process so that the probability of being given a winning in the giving lottery process differs according to the benefit numerical information of the benefit storage means. Machine.

  According to the feature F1, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege numerical information stored when the privilege numerical condition is satisfied and becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value. The game is played while expecting the establishment of the bonus, and the game is played while expecting that the privilege numerical information becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, even if the information does not correspond to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference value, the predetermined privilege is provided by winning in the providing lottery process. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the predetermined privilege is provided, and to provide more opportunities for providing the predetermined benefit.

  Furthermore, the award lottery process is performed so that the probability of the award winning differs depending on the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information. As a result, even if the benefit numerical information is information corresponding to a value less than the benefit reference value, the benefit numeric information affects the probability of being awarded in the award lottery process. Can be increased.

  As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The giving lottery executing means performs the giving lottery process so that the probability of being given a winning in the giving lottery process is higher when the value corresponding to the benefit numerical information of the benefit storage means is larger than when the value is smaller. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, characterized in that the game machine executes:

  According to the feature F2, even if the privilege numerical information is information corresponding to a value smaller than the privilege reference value, the probability that the value of the privilege numerical information is larger in the provisional lottery process is higher than the value of the privilege numerical information. Thereby, even when the privilege numerical information is not information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference value, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the privilege numerical information.

  Feature F3. When the given lottery is awarded in the giving lottery process and the given benefit is given, an erasing means (a function of executing the process of step S2911 in the sub-MPU 82) for erasing the benefit numerical information stored in the benefit storage means is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or F2, comprising:

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to limit the profit resulting from the privilege numerical information to some extent.

Feature F4. The privilege numerical condition is configured to be satisfied in a gaming state (normal AT state) corresponding to the privilege,
It is a configuration in which one execution of the gaming state corresponding to the privilege is ended after the determination is triggered,
The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the bonus numerical information in the privilege storage means can be taken over when the awarding lottery process is not executed or when the awarding lottery process does not result in an award winning.

  According to the feature F4, if the grant lottery process is not executed or if the grant lottery process does not result in the winning, the benefit numeric information can be taken over. The takeover mode is diversified. As a result, the progress of the game is diversified in relation to the privilege numerical information, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature F5. The privilege numerical condition is established in an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) which is more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state),
The predetermined privilege is that the advantageous gaming state continues,
A feature (function of executing the process of step S2913 in the sub-MPU 82) for terminating the advantageous gaming state when the winning is not determined in the awarding lottery process. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature F5, the given lottery process is present as a final opportunity to generate an extended game in an advantageous gaming state, and the degree of attention to the given lottery process is increased. In addition, by referring to the bonus numerical information in the given lottery process that exists as a final opportunity to generate a connected game in the advantageous gaming state, the bonus numerical information acquired just before the end of the advantageous gaming state can be obtained. It is possible to enjoy the benefits. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect the fulfillment of the privilege numerical condition at any timing of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature F6. In the case of a continuous lottery trigger, a continuous lottery execution for executing a continuous lottery process as to whether or not to start a new execution round of the advantageous gaming state after one execution round of the advantageous gaming state ends Means (the function of executing the processing of step S2309 in the sub-MPU 82)
When the privilege criterion determining means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion value, a new execution of the advantageous gaming state is started without executing the continuous lottery process. Yes,
The gaming machine according to Feature F5, wherein the giving lottery executing means executes the giving lottery process after the continuation of the continuation lottery process.

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to diversify the manner of continuation of the advantageous game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F7. Even if the continuous lottery process has been missed, even if the bonus numerical value information stored in the specific storage means in the subsequent post-continuous loss period is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. The gaming machine according to Feature F6, wherein a new execution of the advantageous gaming state is started when the number of times has elapsed.

  According to the feature F7, even if the privilege numerical information does not correspond to the value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value by the time of the determination trigger, the privilege numerical information becomes the value equal to or more than the privilege standard numerical value in the period after the continuation. With the corresponding information, the advantageous game state is extended. As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to set the value corresponding to the bonus numerical information to a larger value before the timing of the determination, so that the bonus numerical information has a larger value until the timing of the determination. The game is played while expecting the game, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature F8. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means in each game;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
The giving lottery execution means is configured to provide the giving lottery so that the probability of the giving lottery differs according to not only the value corresponding to the benefit numerical information of the benefit storage means but also a result of the winning lottery process or a winning result in a corresponding game. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the gaming machine executes a lottery process.

  According to the feature F8, not only the value corresponding to the privilege numerical information but also the winning combination or the winning result in the corresponding game affects the probability of being awarded in the award lottery process. This diversifies the points to be noted in performing the award lottery process, and enhances the interest of the game.

  Feature F9. If the result of the role lottery process in the game is a specific role win or a specific role prize is generated, if the grant lottery process does not result in the grant lottery, the grant lottery process is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature F8, further comprising means for increasing the number of continuous games in the state (the function of making an affirmative determination in Step S2912 in the sub-MPU 82).

  According to the feature F9, the number of continuous games in a state in which the awarded lottery process is executed can be increased even when the awarded lottery process is not performed in the awarded lottery process in spite of the specific role winning or the specific role winning. . As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player in the case where the specific lottery processing or the specific role prize is not achieved in the special lottery process despite the special role winning.

Feature F10. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
The pattern display means is configured to start the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and to stop the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72);
With
The feature F1 is characterized in that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied according to a result of a lottery process executed when the start operation means is operated or a winning result after the variable display of the pattern is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of F9 to F9.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature F10, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

Feature F11. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The gaming machine is
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to Feature F10, wherein the predetermined privilege is to enable the execution of a game in a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the role becomes the order corresponding combination.

  In the gaming machine such as the feature F11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features G1 to G10, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Feature G1. Role lottery execution means for executing a role lottery process (function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72);
Winning correspondence giving means (a function of executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for giving a winning correspondence privilege corresponding to a winning combination in the above-mentioned lottery process;
In at least one condition that a predetermined combination (normal replay combination) has been won in the combination lottery process in the transition expected state (transition chance state), the advantage of the player is higher than the predetermined game state (non-AT state). Advantageous transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a high advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) (a function of executing the processing of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-MPU 82);
Expectation to increase the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the expected transition state, with at least one condition that a different role (expectation improving role) is won in the combination lottery process in the expected transition state. Degree improvement means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1605 and S1606 in the sub-MPU 82);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature G1, the transition to the advantageous gaming state can occur when the predetermined role is won in the transition expected state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting the winning of the predetermined combination in the expected transition state, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, if another role is elected in the expected transition state, the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the expected transition state is increased, so that the player may not only win the predetermined role but also another role in the expected transition state. It is expected that the roles expected to win will be diversified. As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

  Feature G2. The game according to Feature G1, wherein the expectation improving means extends the duration of the expected transition state, with at least one condition that the different role has been won in the role lottery process. Machine.

  According to the feature G2, in the case where another role is elected, the duration of the expected transition state can be extended, so that the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs can be increased.

Feature G3. A transfer lottery executing means (a function of executing the process of step S1609 in the sub-MPU 82) for executing a transfer lottery process when the predetermined role is won in the role lottery process in the transfer expected state;
The advantageous transition means transitions a gaming state to the advantageous gaming state when a transitional winning is achieved in the transitional lottery process,
The feature G1 is characterized in that the expectation improving means increases a probability of a transitional win in the transitional lottery processing, with at least one condition that the different role is won in the role lottery processing. Or the gaming machine according to G2.

  According to the feature G3, when another role is won, the probability of the transfer winning in the transfer lottery process can be increased, so that the degree of expectation that the transition to the advantageous game state occurs can be increased.

  Feature G4. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3, wherein a probability of winning the predetermined role at least in the expected transition state is higher than a probability of winning the another role.

  According to the feature G4, it is possible to increase the frequency of winning the predetermined combination in the transition expected state, and it is possible to provide many opportunities to expect the transition to the advantageous gaming state. In addition, when a winning combination with a low winning probability is won, it is common that an advantageous situation may occur for the player. In the case of winning, the expectation of shifting to the advantageous game state increases, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when winning another role.

  Feature G5. The feature G1 according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the predetermined combination serves as an opportunity for giving the advantageous game state in the expected transition state, but does not serve as an opportunity for grant in another game state. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G5, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in winning the predetermined combination in the expected transition state.

  Feature G6. The game according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the separate role does not serve as an award for the advantageous gaming state in the expected transition state, but serves as an award for the additional gaming state. Machine.

  According to the feature G6, it is possible to give the player a recognition that another role is an advantageous role, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to winning another role.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein the winning correspondence giving means gives a predetermined winning correspondence privilege when the predetermined lottery is won in the winning lottery process.

  According to the feature G7, it is possible to increase the advantage in the case of the predetermined combination, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the predetermined combination winning.

Feature G8. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
The pattern display means is configured to start the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the start operation means and to stop the variable display of the pattern based on the operation of the stop operation means. Variable display control means for controlling (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72);
With
The role lottery execution means is for executing the role lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning-correspondence granting means is configured to grant the winning-correspondence privilege as occurrence of a prize when a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination drawing process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7.

  In the gaming machine having the feature G8, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

  Feature G9. The feature G8 is characterized in that when the predetermined combination is won in the combination lottery process, a winning is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the pattern. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature G9, when a predetermined combination is won, a prize corresponding thereto is generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop operation means, so that it is clear to the player that the opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state has occurred. It becomes possible to make them recognize.

Feature G10. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
As the role selected by the role lottery process, an order-corresponding role (first bell role and second bell role) capable of generating a prize when the variable display of the patterns on the plurality of variable display portions is stopped in a predetermined order. Role) exists,
The gaming machine according to feature G8 or G9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding combination is won.

  In the gaming machine having the feature G10, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features H1 to H7, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic H group>
Feature H1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means in each game;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
A special waiting period (start wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game when a special event occurs, which is one of the special lottery result of the role lottery process and the special stop result of the pattern. (A function of executing the processing of steps S805 to S806, steps S812 to S813, and steps S906 to S907 in the main MPU 72)
If the special event has occurred in a standby avoidance situation (when the value of the bonus AT counter is 1 or more, a penalty situation), the special standby period setting means does not set the special standby period or The standby avoidance means for setting a standby period shorter than the special standby period (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S804 of the main MPU 72, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S811, and a negative determination in step S901) Function, a function of making a negative determination in step S902, and a function of making a positive determination in step S905).
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature H1, the special standby period is set when a special event that is either a special role winning or a special role prize occurs, thereby emphasizing that the special event has occurred through the setting of the special waiting period. It is possible to do. As a result, the player feels the surprise that the special standby period has been set, and the exhilaration of the occurrence of the special event is enhanced. On the other hand, when the special standby period is set, the progress of the game is waited, so that there may be a situation where the player is made to think that it is troublesome. On the other hand, in such a situation, by setting the special standby period not to be set or by shortening the standby period, the special standby period can be generated in a preferable situation. As described above, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature H2. The special standby period setting means, the measurement of the special standby period is started after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to claim H1, wherein said variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of said pattern during said special standby period.

  According to the feature H2, when the special standby period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special standby period is set. . On the other hand, if the special standby period is set in an unfavorable situation, the variable display of the picture is not started in spite of the fact that the game is to be started, which may make the user feel troublesome. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring by not setting the special standby period or shortening the standby period.

  Feature H3. An effect control unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1109 and S1206 in the sub-MPU 82) that causes the effect execution unit to execute the special event response effect during the special standby period. A gaming machine according to the feature H1 or H2.

  According to the feature H3, during the special standby period, the special event-response effect is executed, so that the sense of excitement that the special event has occurred can be enhanced. On the other hand, if the special standby period is set in an unfavorable situation and the special event response effect is executed, the player may be uncomfortable, but in such a situation, the special standby period is not set. By doing so or shortening the waiting period, special event response effects are not executed.

Feature H4. When the special event occurs in a predetermined game state (non-AT state), the advantage transfer means (main) that shifts the game state to an advantageous game state (bonus AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined game state. Function of executing the processes of steps S802 to S803, S809 to S810, and S903 to S904 in the side MPU 72).
When the special event occurs in the advantageous gaming state, the number of executions of the advantageous gaming state can be increased, or the number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state can be increased,
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the standby avoidance state is a state in which the game is in the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature H4, the special standby period is set for the occurrence of the special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, so that the transition to the advantageous gaming state is emphasized and the special standby period is used as a break of the gaming state. And the effect of enhancing the player's euphoria can be achieved. On the other hand, in the advantageous game state, since the player is conscious of the digestion of the game, if a special waiting period is set for the occurrence of a special event in the middle, the player may think that it is troublesome There is. On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring by not setting the special standby period or shortening the standby period.

Feature H5. When the special event occurs in a predetermined game state (non-AT state), the advantage transfer means (main) that shifts the game state to an advantageous game state (bonus AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than the predetermined game state. A function of executing the processing of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904 in the side MPU 72);
In the event that the special event occurs in a penalty situation, a transition restricting unit (a function of making a negative determination in step S901 in the main MPU 72) that restricts the transition of the gaming state to the advantageous gaming state by the advantageous transition unit. , And a function of making a negative determination in step S902);
With
The gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H4, wherein the standby avoidance situation is the penalty situation.

  According to the feature H5, the special standby period is set for the occurrence of the special event that triggers the transition to the advantageous gaming state, so that the transition to the advantageous gaming state is emphasized and the special standby period is used as a break of the gaming state. And the effect of enhancing the player's euphoria can be achieved. On the other hand, even if a special event occurs in the penalty situation, the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur. Therefore, if the special standby period is set in such a situation, the player may be uncomfortable. . On the other hand, in such a situation, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring by not setting the special standby period or shortening the standby period.

Feature H6. There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to Feature H4 or H5, wherein said advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which said predetermined order is notified when said order corresponding role is obtained.

  In the gaming machine having the feature H6, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above.

Feature H7. When the special lottery result is obtained, a pre-start standby period setting unit (in the main MPU 72) that waits for the variable display of the pattern until a standby period before the start (first freeze time, second freeze time) elapses in the game. Function for executing the processing of steps S310 and S408).
The pre-start standby period setting means sets the pre-start standby period when the special lottery result is obtained even in the standby avoidance state, wherein the pre-start standby period is set. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H7, when the special lottery result is obtained, the waiting period before the start is set in the game, so that the player can clearly recognize that the special lottery result has been obtained. This allows the player to feel unexpected and elevate the feeling that the waiting period before the start has been set, and to perform the stop operation of the game while recognizing the result of the special lottery. Becomes possible. In addition, since such a function in the waiting period before start can occur regardless of whether or not the standby avoidance state is established, the function can be suitably generated by setting the standby period before start even in the standby avoidance state. It is possible to do.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features I1 to I1. Any one or more of I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, the feature E group, the feature F group, the feature G group, and the feature H group can solve the following problems. It is.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  More specifically, in the slot machine, a lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in a situation where a medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic I group>
Feature I1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of a picture on the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation unit, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation unit based on the operation of the stop operation unit. A variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so as to stop the variable display of the picture in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a role selected by the role lottery process, when a win is made in the role lottery process, a stipulated prize (regular replay role) in which a stipulated prize is generated irrespective of the order in which the variable display of the patterns in the variable display portions is stopped. ) Exists,
A first control unit (main MPU 72) having the variable display control unit; and a second control unit (sub-MPU 82) for performing predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit. ,
The first control means includes:
An order selecting means for selecting an order in which the variable display of the patterns is to be stopped in each of the variable display portions when the winning combination is won in the role lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
An order specifying means (executing a normal replay pressing order determination process in the main MPU 72) for specifying that a correct order event in which the variable display of the pattern on each of the variable display sections is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means has occurred. Function) and
With
The second control means includes:
Order notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S1109 and S3505 in the sub-MPU 82) for notifying the selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
Notification determining means (a function of executing the processing of step S3504 in the sub-MPU 82) for determining whether or not to notify the selection order information by the order notification control means;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature I1, the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit as well as the first control unit as the control unit.

  In this case, the first control means dare to select the order in which the variable display of the pattern should be stopped when the winning combination is established, in which the prescribed winning occurs regardless of the order in which the variable display of the pattern is stopped. In the means, control for notifying the selection order information is executed as necessary. Then, the first control means specifies whether or not the selected order matches the actual stop order. Thereby, even if the progress of the game state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the game state can be performed without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of control units, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the order selecting means always selects the order when the winning combination is won in the role lottery process.

  According to the feature I2, the order is always selected in the case of the winning of the stipulated role, so that it is not necessary to switch between the situation where the order is selected and the situation where the order is not performed. Is simplified.

Feature I3. The second control means executes progress processing means (managing the AT during processing in the sub-MPU 82) for managing the progress of an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function),
The gaming machine according to the features I1 or I2, wherein the notification determining means causes the order notification control means to notify the selected order information in accordance with the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I3, the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, so that the processing load on the first control means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature I1, even if the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, the information from the second control means to the first control means is provided. Without the need to transmit the information, the first control means can grasp the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

Feature I4. The continuation setting is such that when the continuation condition of the advantageous game state is satisfied, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (a function of executing the setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The feature I3 is characterized in that, in a situation where the execution time of the advantageous game state is continued by the continuation setting means, the notification determination means causes the order notification control means to notify the selected order information. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature I4, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the transmission of the information from the second control means to the first control means is not required, and the advantageous game state is not required. It is possible to grasp the occurrence of the state-run villa.

  Feature I5. The gaming machine according to feature I3 or I4, wherein the stipulated combination is a combination that has the highest probability of being won in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress state of the advantageous game state by the first control means, and when the progress state of the advantageous game state changes, the first control means can promptly notify the first control means of the change. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature I6. There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is obtained.

  According to the feature I6, in the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to surely generate the order corresponding winning combination, which is advantageous to the player.

  Feature I7. The first control unit is configured to perform a specific output setting unit (step S3112 and step S3112 in the main-side MPU 72) for performing an external output setting corresponding to the specific based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred is specified by the sequence specifying unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6, further comprising a function of executing the process of S3404).

  According to the feature I7, even if the progress of the game state is independently managed in the second control means, the game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The external output setting corresponding to the progress of the state can be performed by the first control means.

  Feature I8. The specific output setting means is configured to set the specific output corresponding to the specific output based on the fact that the occurrence of the correct order event has been specified a plurality of times by the sequence specifying means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature I8, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the specific output setting is performed when the correct order event occurs by chance.

  Feature I9. The specific output setting unit is configured to specify that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order specifying unit without occurrence of an event that the correct order event does not occur when the winning combination is won. The gaming machine according to Feature I8, wherein the external output setting for the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact.

  According to the feature I9, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the specific output setting is performed when the correct answer event occurs by chance.

  Feature I10. The second control unit is configured to notify the out-of-order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection unit (steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-MPU 82). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I9, further comprising:

  According to the feature I10, it is possible to positively prevent the correct order event from occurring by chance, and it is possible to increase the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means.

Feature I11. The second control means executes progress processing means (managing the AT during processing in the sub-MPU 82) for managing the progress of an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function),
The notification determining means is for causing the sequence notification control means to report the selected order information in accordance with the progress of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to Feature I10, wherein the out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information in accordance with the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature I11, the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, so that the processing load on the first control means is reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress state of the advantageous game state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress state of the advantageous game state. Thereby, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous game state does not need to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature I12. The continuation setting is such that when the continuation condition of the advantageous game state is satisfied, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (a function of executing the setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The notification determining means, when the execution time of the advantageous game state is continued by the continuation setting means, causes the order notification control means to notify the selection order information,
The out-of-sequence notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-sequence information in a situation different from a situation in which the execution time of the advantageous game state is continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to feature I11.

  According to the feature I12, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is managed independently by the second control means, the transmission of the information from the second control means to the first control means is not required, and the advantageous game state is not required. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state villa.

Feature I13. The first control unit executes a specific correspondence process (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72) based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the sequence specifying unit. Function to execute the processing of
The second control means includes a second-side order specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-MPU 82) for specifying that the correct order event has occurred,
The out-of-sequence notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-sequence information based on the fact that the correct-order event has been specified by the second-side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I10 to I12.

  According to the feature I13, the specific control process is executed when the correct order event occurs a plurality of times in the first control means. Therefore, when the correct order event occurs by chance, the specific corresponding process may be performed. Reduced. Further, the second control means executes the out-of-order notification when the correct order event occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being executed more than necessary.

  Feature I14. The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I13, wherein when the winning combination is won, a prize is generated irrespective of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the picture. .

  According to the feature I14, the player's profit is determined by whether or not the selection order information is notified by dare to select the order in which the variable display of the pattern is to be stopped in the case of the winning of the rule combination in which the so-called missing does not occur. It does not fluctuate. This makes it difficult to restrict the selection order information.

Feature I15. The variable display section includes a left variable display section (left reel 32L), a middle variable display section (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display section (right reel 32R),
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I14, wherein the order selecting means does not select an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section.

  According to the feature I15, since the player generally stops the left-side variable display first, the player does not select the order in which the first stop order is the left-side variable display. It is possible to reduce the possibility of performing.

  Feature I16. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I15, wherein the stipulated combination is a replay combination.

  According to the feature I16, it is possible to achieve the above-described operation and effect using the replaying role.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I16, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H7, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of a picture on the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation unit, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation unit based on the operation of the stop operation unit. A variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so as to stop the variable display of the picture in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As a role selected by the role lottery process, when a win is made in the role lottery process, a stipulated prize (regular replay role) in which a stipulated prize is generated irrespective of the order in which the variable display of the patterns in the variable display portions is stopped. ) Exists,
A first control unit (main MPU 72) having the variable display control unit; and a second control unit (sub-MPU 82) for performing predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit. ,
The first control means includes:
An order selecting means for selecting an order in which the variable display of the patterns is to be stopped in each of the variable display portions when the winning combination is won in the role lottery process (a function of executing the process of step S405 in the main MPU 72) When,
An order specifying means (executing a normal replay pressing order determination process in the main MPU 72) for specifying that a correct order event in which the variable display of the pattern on each of the variable display sections is stopped in the order selected by the order selecting means has occurred. Function) and
With
The second control means includes:
Order notification control means (function for executing the processing of steps S1109 and S3505 in the sub-MPU 82) for notifying the selection order information corresponding to the order selected by the order selection means;
An out-of-order notification control unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S3507 and S3605 in the sub-MPU 82) for notifying out-of-order information corresponding to an order different from the order selected by the order selection unit;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced by providing the second control means as well as the first control means as the control means.

  In this case, the first control means daringly selects an order in which the variable display of the pattern is to be stopped in the case of a winning combination in which a specified prize is generated regardless of the order of stopping the variable display of the pattern. The second control means may notify the selected order, or may notify an order different from the selected order. Then, the first control means specifies whether or not the selected order matches the actual stop order. Thereby, even if the progress of the game state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the game state can be performed without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be grasped by the first control means.

  In particular, when the out-of-sequence information is notified, it is possible to positively prevent the occurrence of the correct-order event by chance, and to improve the accuracy of the content grasped by the first control means. Become.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of control units, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced.

Feature J2. The second control means executes progress processing means (managing the AT during processing in the sub-MPU 82) for managing the progress of an advantageous gaming state (normal AT state) in which the player's advantage is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state). Function),
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information according to the progress of the advantageous gaming state,
The gaming machine according to Feature J1, wherein the out-of-order notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-order information in accordance with the progress of the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature J2, the progress of the advantageous gaming state is independently managed by the second control means, so that the processing load on the first control means is reduced. In this case, the selection order information is notified according to the progress state of the advantageous game state, and the different order information is notified according to the progress state of the advantageous game state. Thereby, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the progress of the advantageous game state does not need to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The situation can be accurately grasped by the first control means.

Feature J3. The continuation setting is such that when the continuation condition of the advantageous game state is satisfied, a new execution time of the advantageous game state is started after one execution time of the advantageous game state is completed. Means (a function of executing the setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The order notification control means is configured to notify the selection order information when the execution time of the advantageous game state is continued by the continuation setting means,
The out-of-sequence notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-sequence information in a situation different from a situation in which the execution time of the advantageous game state is continued by the continuation setting means. The gaming machine according to Feature J2.

  According to the feature J3, even if the progress of the advantageous game state is independently managed by the second control means, the transmission of the information from the second control means to the first control means is not required, and the advantageous game state is not required. It is possible to accurately grasp the occurrence of the state villa.

  Feature J4. The gaming machine according to feature J2 or J3, wherein the stipulated combination is a combination having a highest probability of being won in the combination lottery process at least in the advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature J4, it is possible to increase the chances of grasping the progress state of the advantageous game state by the first control means. When the progress state of the advantageous game state changes, the first control means can promptly notify the first control means of the change. It becomes possible to grasp.

Feature J5. There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is obtained.

  According to the feature J5, in the advantageous game state, it is possible to surely generate the order corresponding winning combination, which is advantageous to the player.

Feature J6. The first control unit executes a specific correspondence process (steps S3112 and S3404 in the main MPU 72) based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the sequence specifying unit. Function to execute the processing of
The second control means includes a second-side order specifying means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3510 and S3608 in the sub-MPU 82) for specifying that the correct order event has occurred,
The out-of-sequence notification control means is configured to notify the out-of-sequence information based on the fact that the correct-order event has been specified by the second-side order specifying means. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5.

  According to the feature J6, since the first control means executes the specific response process when the correct order event occurs a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the specific response process is performed when the correct order event occurs by chance. Reduced. Further, the second control means executes the out-of-order notification when the correct order event occurs. Thus, it is possible to prevent the out-of-order notification from being executed more than necessary.

  Feature J7. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6, wherein the order selecting means always selects the order when the winning combination is won in the winning combination determination process.

  According to the feature J7, when the winning combination is determined, the order is always selected, so that the second control means can grasp the progress of the game state independently managed by the second control means. There is no need to change the Therefore, the processing configuration is simplified.

  Feature J8. The first control unit is configured to perform a specific output setting unit (step S3112 and step S3112 in the main-side MPU 72) for performing an external output setting corresponding to the specific based on the fact that the correct order event has occurred is specified by the sequence specifying unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7, further comprising a function of executing the process of S3404).

  According to the feature J8, even if the progress of the game state is independently managed by the second control means, the game is not required to be transmitted from the second control means to the first control means. The external output setting corresponding to the progress of the state can be performed by the first control means.

  Feature J9. The specific output setting unit is configured to perform the external output setting corresponding to the specific based on that the occurrence of the correct order event has been specified a plurality of times by the sequence specifying unit. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature J9, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the specific output setting is performed when the correct order event occurs by chance.

  Feature J10. The specific output setting unit is configured to specify that the correct order event has occurred a plurality of times by the order specifying unit without occurrence of an event that the correct order event does not occur when the winning combination is won. The gaming machine according to feature J9, wherein the external output setting corresponding to the specific correspondence is performed based on the fact.

  According to the feature J10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the specific output setting is performed when the correct order event occurs by chance.

  Feature J11. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10, wherein when the winning combination is won, a prize is generated irrespective of the operation timing of the stop operation means in relation to the variable display position of the picture. .

  According to the feature J11, the player's profit is determined by whether or not the selection order information is notified by daringly selecting the order in which the variable display of the pattern is to be stopped in the case of a winning combination that does not cause a so-called missing. It does not fluctuate. This makes it difficult to restrict the selection order information.

Feature J12. The variable display section includes a left variable display section (left reel 32L), a middle variable display section (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display section (right reel 32R),
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J11, wherein the order selecting means does not select an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section.

  According to the feature J12, since the player generally stops the left variable display section first, by not selecting the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section, the correct order event occurs accidentally. It is possible to reduce the possibility of performing.

  Feature J13. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J12, wherein the stipulated combination is a re-game combination.

  According to the feature J13, it is possible to achieve the above-described effects by using the replaying role.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I16, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first control unit (main MPU 72); and a second control unit (sub MPU 82) that executes predetermined control based on transmission information transmitted by the first control unit.
The second control means includes:
Notification control means (in the sub-side MPU 82) for performing a notification enabling a privilege to be given to a player in each of the first advantageous gaming state (bonus AT state) and the second advantageous gaming state (normal AT state). Function for executing the processing of steps S1109 and S1806);
A second-side ending means (a function of executing the processing of step S2913 in the sub-MPU 82) for ending the second advantageous gaming state when the ending condition of the second advantageous gaming state is satisfied;
With
The first control means includes a first-side ending means (a function of executing the process of step S1009 in the main-side MPU 72) for ending the first advantageous gaming state when an ending condition of the first advantageous gaming state is satisfied. A gaming machine, comprising:

  According to the feature K1, since not only the first control means but also the second control means is provided as the control means, the processing load on the first control means can be reduced. In addition, in each of the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, a notification that enables the privilege to be provided to the player is performed by the second control means. The processing load on the first control means is reduced.

  In this case, the determination of the end trigger of the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state is not entirely performed by the second control means, but the determination of the end trigger of the first advantageous game state is determined by the first control means. Done. As a result, it is possible to execute special processing in the first control means according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to increase the effect of rendering while reducing the processing load on the first control means. It becomes possible.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of control units, it is possible to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced.

  Feature K2. The first control unit sets a progress standby period (end wait time) for waiting for the progress of the game in the game execution unit (reel unit 31) in accordance with the progress of the first advantageous game state. The gaming machine according to feature K1, further comprising (a function of executing the process of step S1011 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature K2, since the progress waiting period is set according to the progress of the first advantageous game state, the progress of the first advantageous gaming state is given while giving the player unexpectedness through the setting of the progress waiting period. This allows the player to recognize the situation.

Feature K3. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means in each game;
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
The gaming machine according to claim K2, wherein said progress standby setting means waits for the progress of the game by setting said progress standby period according to the progress of said first advantageous gaming state.

  According to the feature K3, the progress of the game is awaited by setting the progress waiting period according to the progress of the first advantageous gaming state. In this case, the player feels the surprisingness of waiting for the progress of the game, and can grasp the progress of the first advantageous game state by grasping that the progress waiting period is set. Become.

Feature K4. The progress standby setting means, so that the measurement of the progress standby period is started after the variable display of the pattern is stopped,
The gaming machine according to claim K3, wherein said variable display control means waits for the start of variable display of said pattern during said progress standby period.

  According to the feature K4, when the progress waiting period is set, the start of the variable display of the pattern is waited, so that the player can clearly recognize that the progress waiting period is set. .

  Feature K5. The game according to Feature K4, further comprising a unit (a function of executing the processes of Steps S1109 and S1208 in the sub-MPU 82) during which the progress-standby effect is executed during the progress-standby period. Machine.

  According to the feature K5, it is possible to execute an effect according to the progress of the first advantageous game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature K6. Role lottery execution means for executing a role lottery process (function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72);
A winning correspondence providing means (a function of executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for providing a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the winning lottery process occurs;
With
The first control means determines that at least one of the result of the combination lottery process and the result of the winning is a first correspondence result (first to third special replay combination winning, departure result). As one condition, a first-result-corresponding transition unit that transitions the gaming state to the first advantageous gaming state (a function of executing the processing of steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904 in the main MPU 72). )
The second control means includes:
A second result correspondence transition unit (steps S1614 to S1614 in the sub-MPU 82) that transitions the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state with at least one condition that the response result is a second response result (normal replay winning). Function for executing the processing of step S1617),
Event response transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state with at least one condition that an event different from the response result becomes a response event (executing the processing of steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-MPU 82 Function), and
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, comprising:

  According to the feature K6, the transition pattern is different between the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, so that the game is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, by making the transition pattern of the second advantageous game state more complicated than the transition pattern of the first advantageous game state, the game is diversified while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible.

Feature K7. The first control means is configured to start a new execution cycle of the first advantageous game state based on a first continuation condition being satisfied when one execution cycle of the first advantageous game state is completed. Means (the function of executing the process of step S219 in the main MPU 72)
The second control means is configured to start a new execution of the second advantageous game state based on the establishment of the second continuation condition when one execution of the second advantageous game state is completed. Means (a function of executing the setting process of the pre-branch AT state in the sub-MPU 82 and the processes of steps S2909 to S2911),
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the number of patterns satisfying the second continuation condition is greater than the number of patterns satisfying the first continuation condition.

  According to the feature K7, by making the continuation condition establishment patterns different between the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state, the diversification of the game is achieved, and the interest of the game is improved. In this case, the continuation condition for the second advantageous game state is more frequently satisfied than the continuation condition for the first advantageous game state. Therefore, the game load is reduced while reducing the processing load on the first control means. Can be diversified.

Feature K8. The second control means includes:
When the privilege numerical condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state (the privilege point is won in the privilege point lottery process), the privilege numerical information (privilege point) is stored in the privilege storage means (the privilege point counter of the sub-side RAM 84). A storage execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2005, S2007, S2011, and S2504 in the sub-MPU 82) for storing;
In the event that the determination is triggered, the privilege criterion determining means (step S2301 in the sub-MPU 82) determines whether or not the privilege numerical information stored in the privilege storing means is information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion numerical value. And a function of executing the process of step S2609);
With
When the privilege criterion determination means determines that the information corresponds to a value equal to or greater than the privilege criterion value, a new execution cycle of the second advantageous game state is started. K1 to K7 A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the characteristic K8, the privilege numerical information stored in the second advantageous gaming state when the privilege numerical value condition is satisfied becomes information corresponding to a value equal to or more than the privilege reference numerical value, so that the second advantageous gaming state is continued. In the second advantageous gaming state, the player performs a game while expecting that the privilege numerical condition is satisfied, and performs a game while expecting the privilege numerical information to be information corresponding to a value equal to or greater than the privilege reference numerical value. Becomes Thereby, the interest of the game is improved. In this case, since the continuation setting of the second advantageous game state in relation to the privilege numerical information is performed by the second control means, the interest of the game is improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Becomes possible.

Feature K9. The second control means determines whether or not to start a new execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state after one execution cycle of the advantageous gaming state is completed when a continuous lottery trigger occurs A continuous lottery executing means (a function of executing the processing of step S2309 in the sub-MPU 82) for executing the processing;
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, wherein a new execution of the second advantageous gaming state is started when a continuous winning is achieved in the continuous lottery process.

  According to the feature K9, when the continuous lottery process results in the continuous winning, the second advantageous gaming state runs in a row, so that the player plays the game while expecting the continuous winning in the second advantageous gaming state. As a result, the interest in the game is improved. In this case, since the continuation setting of the second advantageous game state in relation to the continuous lottery process is performed by the second control means, the interest of the game is improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. Becomes possible.

Feature K10. Role lottery execution means for executing a role lottery process (function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72);
A winning correspondence providing means (a function of executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for providing a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the winning lottery process occurs;
With
The first control means sets the remaining execution of the first advantageous gaming state as at least one condition that a corresponding result, which is one of the result of the combination lottery process and the result of the winning, is a first corresponding result. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K9, further comprising a number setting means (function of executing the processing of steps S803, S810, and S904 in the main MPU 72) for setting the number of times.

  According to the feature K10, since the first advantageous game state can be extended, the player plays the game while expecting the extended residence in the first advantageous game state, so that the interest of the game is improved. Further, since the number of remaining executions of the first advantageous game state is set in relation to the result of the winning lottery process or the result of winning, the interest of the game can be improved while reducing the processing load of the first control means. It becomes possible to plan.

Feature K11. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of a picture on the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation unit, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation unit based on the operation of the stop operation unit. A variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so as to stop the variable display of the picture in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
With
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state are gaming states in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding combination is won, and any one of the features K1 to K10. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine having the feature K11, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K11, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features L1 to L9, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature I group, the feature J group, and the feature K group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  More specifically, in the slot machine, a lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in a situation where a medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  In addition, in a slot machine, there is known a configuration in which an effect device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided in addition to the reel device, and the attraction of a game is improved through an effect performed by the effect device. Further, in the configuration in which the effect device is provided as described above, an effect control device is provided separately from the main control device for performing the lottery process and the drive control of the reel, and the effect device is controlled by the effect control device. There is also known a configuration in which the processing load on the main control unit is reduced.

  Here, it is necessary to further optimize the configuration in a configuration in which the processing load of each control unit is reduced by providing a plurality of control units as in the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this regard. is there.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of a picture on the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation unit, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation unit based on the operation of the stop operation unit. A variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so as to stop the variable display of the picture in
When the variable display of the pattern is stopped, based on the display of the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process, a prize correspondence granting means (a prize determination in the main MPU 72) for giving a prize correspondence privilege to the player. Function to perform processing),
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the role selected by the role lottery process, a sequence corresponding role (first bell role and a first bell role) that enables generation of a sequence corresponding winning when the variable display of the patterns on the plurality of variable display portions is stopped in a predetermined order. 2 bell role) exists,
First control means (main MPU 72) having the role lottery execution means and the variable display control means,
A second control unit (sub-MPU 82) for performing notification control so that the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding combination is won in the advantageous game state (normal AT state);
With
The first control means includes:
Prize specifying means (a function of executing the process of step S3203 in the main MPU 72) for specifying whether or not the sequence corresponding prize has occurred when the order corresponding prize has been won;
First setting means for performing an external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the winning corresponding to the order has occurred in the case where the order corresponding combination has been won by the winning specifying means. A function of executing the process of step S3105 in the main MPU 72);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature L1, the processing load of the first control unit is reduced by providing the second control unit as well as the first control unit as the control unit. Further, since the notification control in the predetermined order in the advantageous game state is performed by the second control means, the processing load of the first control means can be reduced in a configuration in which the interest of the game is improved by setting the advantageous game state. Can be

  In this case, the first control means performs an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state when it is specified that the order-based winning has occurred when the order-winning combination is won. Thus, even in the configuration in which the progress control of the advantageous gaming state is independently performed by the second control means, it is not necessary to transmit information from the second control means to the first control means, and the state is the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to make an external output setting indicating that this is the case.

  As described above, external output can be suitably performed.

  Feature L2. The first setting means is an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state when the number of times specified by the prize specifying means that the order corresponding prize has occurred has occurred a specified number of times defined as a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the game is performed.

  According to the feature L2, the possibility that the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state is performed when the order-based winning is accidentally generated is reduced.

  Feature L3. The first setting means does not specify that the order-specific prize has not occurred by the prize specifying means, and the number of times the prize specifying means has specified that the order-specific prize has occurred is plural times. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state is performed when a specific number of times specified as (i) occur.

  According to the feature L3, the possibility that the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state is performed when the order-based winning is accidentally generated is reduced.

Feature L4. The variable display section includes a left variable display section (left reel 32L), a middle variable display section (middle reel 32M), and a right variable display section (right reel 32R),
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the predetermined order does not include an order in which the first stop order is the left variable display unit.

  According to the feature L4, the player generally stops the left variable display section first, so that the order in which the first stop order is the left variable display section is not included as the predetermined order, so that the order-based winning is accidentally performed. It is possible to reduce the possibility of occurrence.

  Feature L5. A disadvantage that, in a predetermined game state other than the advantageous game state, the variable display of the pattern on the variable display section different from the left variable display section is first stopped, thereby causing an event that is disadvantageous to the player. The gaming machine according to Feature L4, further comprising setting means (function of executing the processing in Steps S1408 and S1411 in the sub-MPU 82).

  According to the feature L5, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an order-based winning is accidentally generated in a predetermined game state.

  Feature L6. The first control means, based on the fact that the order corresponding prize has not been generated when the order corresponding combination has been won, is specified by the winning specifying means, indicates that the game is not in the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, further including a second setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S3107 in the main MPU 72) for performing output setting.

  According to the feature L6, it is determined whether or not the order-based prize has occurred in both the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state and the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is not in the advantageous game state. Should be monitored. As a result, the types of events to be monitored are suppressed, and the processing load is reduced.

Feature L7. The first setting means is configured to perform an external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state when the number of times that the order-specific prize has occurred has been specified by the prize specifying means has reached a first specific number. And
The second setting means sets an external output setting indicating that the game is not in the advantageous game state when the number of times specified by the winning specifying means that the order-specific prize has not occurred is the second specified number. To do,
The gaming machine according to Feature L6, wherein the first specified number is different from the second specified number.

  According to the feature L7, it is monitored whether or not the order-based winning has occurred in both the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous gaming state and the case of performing the external output setting indicating that the game is not in the advantageous gaming state. In such a configuration, it is possible to set the execution timing and accuracy of the external output setting according to the type of each external output setting.

  Feature L8. The gaming machine according to Feature L7, wherein the first specific number is greater than the second specific number.

  According to the feature L8, it is possible to accurately perform the external output setting indicating that the game is in the advantageous game state while enabling the external output setting indicating that the game is not in the advantageous game state to be performed early.

  Feature L9. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L8, wherein a plurality of roles are included as the order corresponding roles.

  According to the feature L9, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in setting the winning probability of each winning combination and, at the early stage, to set the external output corresponding to the advantageous gaming state when the gaming state is established.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features L1 to L9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features M1 to M10, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  The invention of the feature L group can solve the following problem.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  More specifically, in the slot machine, a lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in a situation where a medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, in gaming machines such as those described above, external output of information is performed in order to allow the management computer of the gaming hall to recognize the state of the gaming machine. There is room.

<Characteristic M group>
Feature M1. Role lottery execution means for executing a role lottery process (function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72);
A winning correspondence providing means (a function of executing a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for providing a winning corresponding privilege when a winning corresponding to a winning combination in the winning lottery process occurs;
With
As a role selected by the role lottery process, there is a winning maintenance role (CB role) whose winning state is maintained until a prize corresponding to the winning is generated,
The gaming machine is changed to a gaming state (normal AT state) in which an advantage of the player is higher than a predetermined gaming state (non-AT state), with at least one condition that the gaming machine is in the winning state of the winning maintaining role. Characterized in that it is provided with an advantageous transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S1614 to S1617 and steps S1706 to S1709 in the sub-MPU 82).

  According to the feature M1, since the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs when the winning maintaining combination is in the winning state, it is possible to limit the period in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state is possible in relation to the winning combination. Become. As a result, the player pays attention to winning the winning maintaining combination and maintaining the winning state of the winning maintaining combination. As described above, novel game contents can be provided.

In addition, "a pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying a pattern,
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means in each game;
With
The role lottery execution means is for executing the role lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means, when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, when a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process is displayed, the winning corresponding privilege is given as a winning occurrence,
Even if the winning maintaining combination is won, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintaining combination by the operation mode of the stop operating means. " It is possible to generate and win a prize corresponding to the role, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  Feature M2. Non-advantageous transition means (main side) for shifting to a non-advantageous game state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is not greater than the number of game media of the player at the start when a prize corresponding to the winning maintaining combination is generated. The gaming machine according to feature M1, further comprising a function of executing the processing of steps S704 to S706 in the MPU 72).

  According to the feature M2, when the winning maintainer is in the winning state, when the prize is generated, the state shifts to the non-advantageous game state, but when the prize is not generated, the shift to the advantageous game state occurs. there's a possibility that. As a result, it is possible to make the profit of the player greatly different depending on whether or not a winning of the winning combination is generated, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning combination.

  Feature M3. The gaming machine according to feature M2, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the end is the same as the number of game media of the player at the start.

  According to the feature M3, when a winning of the winning maintaining combination is generated, not only the opportunity to shift to the advantageous gaming state disappears, but also the gaming machine shifts to the non-advantageous gaming state. Although no increase is expected, no decrease occurs. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player who has unintentionally generated the winning of the winning combination.

Feature M4. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means in each game;
With
The role lottery execution means is for executing the role lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means, when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, when a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process is displayed, the winning corresponding privilege is given as a winning occurrence,
The gaming machine according to feature M2 or M3, wherein the non-advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that continues over a plurality of games.

  According to the feature M4, it is possible to greatly differ the profit of the player depending on whether or not a winning of the winning combination is generated, and it is possible to increase a degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning combination. .

  Feature M5. It is provided with a winning notification means (internal status notification unit 63, a function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 72) so that the winning status notification of the winning status of the winning maintenance role is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4.

  According to the feature M5, it becomes possible to urge the player not to generate the prize when the winning state of the winning combination is achieved.

Feature M6. External setting means (function of executing the processing of steps S3105, S3404, and S3406 in the main MPU 72) for performing an external output setting indicating the advantageous gaming state;
The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state before the external output setting indicating that it is the advantageous gaming state is performed when the winning maintaining role is in the winning state. The gaming machine according to feature M5, further comprising:

  According to the feature M6, it is possible to notify the player that the winning state of the winning combination has been won before notifying outside the gaming machine.

Feature M7. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
A plurality of stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) provided corresponding to the variable display unit and operated to stop variable display of a picture on the corresponding variable display unit;
The variable display of a picture in the plurality of variable display units is started based on the operation of the start operation unit, and the variable display unit corresponding to the stop operation unit based on the operation of the stop operation unit. A variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means so as to stop the variable display of the picture in
With
The role lottery execution means is for executing the role lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning correspondence granting means, when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, when a stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery process is displayed, the winning corresponding privilege is given as a winning occurrence,
If the winning lottery is won in the winning lottery process, the winning notifying means sets the winning until the variable display of the pattern on the variable display unit to be finally stopped can be stopped. The gaming machine according to feature M5 or M6, wherein the state notification is started.

  According to the feature M7, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the winning maintainer has been won before a prize corresponding to the winning maintainer occurs in a game that has been won by the winning maintainer. It is possible to avoid occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintainer.

  Feature M8. The winning notification unit may be configured to start the winning state notification before the stop operation of the variable display of the pattern is enabled in the game, when the winning maintaining combination is won in the winning lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature M7, wherein

  According to the feature M8, it is possible for the player to recognize that the winning maintainer has been won before the variable display of the pattern in the game is started, and to avoid occurrence of a winning corresponding to the winning maintainer. It becomes possible.

Feature M9. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means in each game;
With
The role lottery execution means is for executing the role lottery process when the start operation means is operated,
The winning-correspondence granting means is configured to grant the winning-correspondence privilege as a winning occurrence when a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the winning combination drawing process is displayed when the variable display of the symbol is stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8.

  In the gaming machine having the feature M9, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

Feature M10. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to feature M9, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is obtained.

  In the gaming machine having the feature M10, the excellent effects as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features M1 to M10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features N1 to N13 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic N group>
Feature N1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture;
Combination lottery executing means (function for executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72) for executing combination lottery processing when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the picture;
As one game, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the start operation means being operated, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, Variable display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) for controlling the picture display means in each game;
When the stopped pattern corresponding to the result of the role lottery processing is displayed when the variable display of the pattern is stopped, a winning correspondence providing means (a winning determination process in the main MPU 72) for providing the winning corresponding privilege as a winning occurrence. Function to execute)
A first shifting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S704 to S706 in the main MPU 72) for shifting to a first gaming state (CB state) when the first shifting condition is satisfied;
The second shifting means (steps S802 to S803, steps S809 to S810, and steps S903 to S904 in the main MPU 72) for shifting to the second gaming state (bonus AT state) when the second shifting condition is satisfied. Function to perform)
In the case where a predetermined number of continuous games have been executed in the second gaming state, a game corresponding ending means for ending one execution of the second gaming state (executing steps S1007 to S1012 in the main MPU 72) Function),
In a game in which the condition for shifting to the second game state is satisfied or in the second game state, when the first shift condition is satisfied, priority means for giving priority to the game content in the first game state ( A function of executing the process of step S706 in the main MPU 72);
The number-of-games management means (the processing of step S1005 in the main MPU 72) in which the game executed in the situation where the game content in the first game state is prioritized by the priority means is used as the consumption of the predetermined number of continuous games. Function to perform)
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature N1, in the game in which the transition condition to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state, when the first transition condition is satisfied, the game content in the first gaming state is prioritized. In this case, the progress to the second game state is not completely stopped, but the game executed in the situation where the game content in the first game state is prioritized is equal to the predetermined number of continuous games in the second game state. Treated as digestion. Thereby, the player does not cause the transition to the first gaming state in the second gaming state, for example, or expects that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state, for example, In the second game state, the player intentionally shifts to the first game state, or, for example, in the second game state, expects to shift to the first game state. As described above, novel game contents can be provided.

  Note that a configuration in which the first gaming state is a gaming state that continues over a plurality of games may be applied.

Feature N2. The second shifting means is configured to, after a condition for ending the first gaming state is satisfied in a situation where the game content in the first gaming state is prioritized by the priority means, to end the shifting to the second gaming state. Transfer means (function of making an affirmative determination in steps S1103 and S1104 in the sub-MPU 82 and executing the processing of step S1106);
In the second game state to which the transition has been made by the transition control of the transition means after the termination, the game correspondence ending means is provided when the remaining game number of the predetermined continuation game number at the time of the transition control is exhausted. The gaming machine according to feature N1, wherein the number of executions is terminated.

  According to the feature N2, in the game in which the condition for shifting to the second gaming state is satisfied or in the second gaming state, when shifting to the first gaming state, the second gaming state is set after the end of the first gaming state. Also, the second game state ends when the remaining predetermined number of continuous games after the number of games executed in the first game state is subtracted is exhausted. As a result, the first game state and the second game state can be correlated with each other as compared with a configuration in which the transition of the second game state is simply invalidated, and novel game contents can be provided. Become.

  Feature N3. The post-end shifting means is configured to determine whether or not the first game state end condition is satisfied in a situation in which the game content in the first game state is prioritized by the priority means, and The gaming machine according to the feature N2, wherein the game machine shifts to the second gaming state when the game has become available.

  According to the feature N3, the second game state is not started immediately after the end of the first game state, but the second game state is not started unless the winning state of the winning combination is achieved. Thereby, the player who expects the transition to the second game state will pay attention to whether or not to win the winning maintaining combination after the end of the first game state, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature N4. The number-of-games managing means is configured to determine whether or not the first gaming state finish condition is satisfied in a situation in which the priority means prioritizes the game content in the first gaming state, and The gaming machine according to Feature N3, wherein a game executed until now is treated as a consumption of the predetermined number of continuous games.

  According to the feature N4, the amount of the game required until the winning maintenance combination is won after the end of the first gaming state is treated as the consumption of the predetermined number of continuous games in the second gaming state. As a result, the player who expects the transition to the second gaming state is expected to win the winning maintaining role after the end of the first gaming state until the game of the predetermined number of continuous games is completed. The game is played, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature N5. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein a player has a higher degree of advantage in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

  According to the feature N5, the player does not cause the transition to the first gaming state in the second gaming state or expects that the transition to the first gaming state does not occur in the second gaming state. As a result, the degree of attention to the game in the second game state is improved. Thereby, the interest of the game is improved.

  Feature N6. The gaming machine according to feature N5, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the time of the end is not larger than the number of game media of the player at the time of the start.

  According to the feature N6, the profit of the player greatly differs depending on whether or not the transition to the first gaming state occurs in the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the second game state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature N7. The gaming machine according to Feature N6, wherein the first gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of game media of the player at the time of the end is the same as the number of game media of the player at the time of the start.

  According to the feature N7, in the first game state, an increase in game media is not expected, but no decrease occurs. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player when the transition to the first game state occurs.

Feature N8. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
There is an order-corresponding role (a first bell role and a second bell role) that enables a prize to be generated when the plurality of variable display portions are stopped in a predetermined order, as a role selected by the role lottery process. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the predetermined order is notified when the order corresponding role is obtained.

  According to the feature N8, the predetermined order is notified in the second game state, so that the game state is advantageous to the player.

Feature N9. As a role selected by the role lottery process, there is a winning maintenance role (CB role) whose winning state is maintained until a prize corresponding to the winning is generated,
The first transition condition is that a prize corresponding to the winning maintainer occurs,
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N8, wherein the second transition condition is satisfied as being at least one condition that the winning state of the winning combination is won.

  According to the feature N9, it is possible to cause the transition to the second gaming state by maintaining the winning state of the winning maintenance combination, and it is the second gaming state when generating a winning corresponding to the winning maintenance combination. The game proceeds to the first game state, and the number of games consumed in the first game state is subtracted from the predetermined number of continuous games. This makes it possible to greatly differ the progress of the subsequent game depending on whether or not to generate a prize corresponding to the winning maintainer, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the winning state of the winning maintainer. Become.

  The operation of the stop operating means can be performed by applying the configuration that "even if the winning maintainer is won, it is possible to avoid occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintainer by the operation mode of the stop operating means". According to the mode, it is possible to generate and win a prize corresponding to the winning maintenance combination, and the interest of the game is improved.

Feature N10. The second gaming state has a higher player's advantage than the first gaming state,
It is provided with a winning notification means (internal status notification unit 63, a function of executing the process of step S707 in the main MPU 72) so that the winning status notification of the winning status of the winning maintenance role is executed. The gaming machine according to Feature N9.

  According to the feature N10, it becomes possible to urge the player not to generate the prize when the winning state of the winning maintaining combination is obtained.

Feature N11. External setting means for performing external output setting indicating the second gaming state (a function of executing the processing of steps S3118, S3408 and S3703 in the main MPU 72),
The winning notification means is configured to, when the winning state of the winning maintenance role is entered, start the notification of the winning state before the external output setting indicating the second gaming state is performed. The gaming machine according to feature N10, characterized in that:

  According to the feature N11, it is possible to notify the player that the winning state of the winning combination has been won before notifying outside the gaming machine.

Feature N12. The picture display means includes a plurality of variable display sections (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) of the picture,
A plurality of the stop operation means corresponding to the variable display portion of the pattern,
The variable display control means starts the variable display of a picture on the plurality of variable display units based on the operation of the start operation means, and the stop operation means based on the operation of the stop operation means. Controlling the picture display means, so that the variable display of the picture in the variable display unit corresponding to is stopped,
The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state before the variable display of the pattern on all of the variable display portions is stopped when the winning maintaining combination is won in the winning lottery process. The gaming machine according to feature N10 or N11, wherein

  According to the feature N12, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the winning maintainer has been won before a prize corresponding to the winning maintainer occurs in a game that has been won by the winning maintainer. It is possible to avoid occurrence of a prize corresponding to the winning maintainer.

  Feature N13. The winning notification means is configured to start the notification of the winning state before the variable display of the pattern is started in the game when the winning maintaining combination is won in the winning lottery process. The gaming machine according to Feature N12, wherein

  According to the feature N13, it is possible for the player to recognize that the winning keeper has been won before the variable display of the pattern in the game is started, thereby avoiding the occurrence of the prize corresponding to the winning keeper. It becomes possible.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features N1 to N13, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B11, the features C1 to C11, the features D1 to D11, the features E1 to E10, the features F1 to F11, the features G1 to G10, and the features H1 to H1. Any one or more of H7, features I1 to I16, features J1 to J13, features K1 to K11, features L1 to L9, and features M1 to M10 may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature M group and the feature N group can solve the following problems.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, a configuration is generally used in which an effect for causing the player to predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery is performed.

  More specifically, in the slot machine, a lottery process is executed by the control means by operating the start lever in a situation where a medal is bet. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation of the reel is started by the rotation start control being executed by the control means, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means executes the rotation start control. The rotation of the reel is stopped by executing the rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation stop of the reels corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

  Here, it is necessary to provide novel game contents in the gaming machines as exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player is operated according to the pattern after the stop A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine, 31 ... Reel unit, 32L, 32M, 32R ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop button, 63 ... Internal state notification part, 66 ... Image display device, 67 ... Bonus point notification part, 68 stock notification unit, 69 winning number notification unit, 70 main control unit, 72 main MPU, 73 main ROM, 74 main RAM, 80 sub control unit, 82 sub MPU, 83 ... Sub-side ROM, 84 ... Sub-side RAM.

Claims (1)

Role lottery execution means for executing a role lottery process;
Winning correspondence giving means for giving a winning correspondence privilege corresponding to a winning combination in the combination lottery process,
In the pre-transition state, the transition lottery process is executed under at least one condition that the predetermined lottery has been won in the role lottery process, and when the transition lottery process results in the transitional lottery, the advantage of the player is predetermined. Advantageous transition means for transitioning the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state higher than the gaming state,
In the pre-transition state, a lottery process is performed as to whether or not the degree of expectation regarding the advantageous gaming state is to be increased under at least one condition that another role has been won in the role lottery process. An expectation improving means for increasing the expectation in the state before the transition when winning to increase the
With
The separate role does not serve as an opportunity for giving the advantageous gaming state in the state before the transition, but serves as the opportunity for grant in other gaming states,
The expectation improved means state, and are not to increase the expectation by increasing the probability of transition winning at the transition lottery process,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined combination is a trigger for giving the advantageous gaming state in the pre-transition state, but is not a trigger for the grant in the other gaming state .

Images